Ruby Tech Switch GS 2124C User Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C  
User's Manual  
24 Gigabit L2 Managed Switch  
Release 0.98  
2005, RubyTech Corporation. All rights reserved. All brand and product names are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of their respective companies.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Unless the explicit written permission of RubyTech Corporation, this document in  
whole or in part shall not be replicated or modified or amended or transmitted, in any from, or by any means manual, electric, electronic, electromagnetic,  
mechanical, optical or otherwise for any purpose.  
DURATION OF HARDWARE WARRANTY  
HARDWARE: In accordance with the provisions described under, RubyTech Corporation (hereinafter called “RubyTech”) warrants its hardware products  
(hereinafter referred to as "Product") specified herein to be for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of shipment.  
Should a Product fail to perform during the effective warranty period as described above, RubyTech shall replace the defective Product or part, or delivering  
a functionally equivalent Product or part in receipt of customer’s request, provided that the customer complies with the return material authorization (RMA)  
procedures and returns all defective Product prior to installation of the replacements to RubyTech.  
All defective Products must be returned to RubyTech with issuance of a Return Material Authorization number (RMA number) assigned to the reseller from  
whom the end customer originally purchased the Product. The reseller is responsible for ensuring the shipments are insured, with the transportation  
charges prepaid and the RMA number clearly marked on the outside of the package. RubyTech will not accept collect shipments or those returned without  
an RMA number.  
RubyTech shall not be responsible for any software, firmware, information or memory data contained in, stored on or integrated with any Product returned to  
RubyTech pursuant to any warranty.  
EXCLUSIONS. The warranty as mentioned above does not apply to the following conditions, in RubyTech’s judgment, it contains (1) customer does not  
comply with the manual instructions offered by RubyTech in installation, operation, repair or maintenance, (2) Product fails due to damage from unusual  
external or electrical stress, shipment, storage, accident, abuse or misuse, (3) Product is used in an extra hazardous environment or activities, (4) any serial  
number on the Product has been removed or defaced, (5) this warranty will be of no effect if the repair is via anyone other than RubyTech or the approved  
agents, or (6) In the event of any failures or delays by either party hereto in the performance of all or any part of this agreement due to acts of God, war, riot,  
insurrection, national emergency, strike, embargo, storm, earthquake, or other natural forces, or by the acts of anyone not a party to this agreement, or by  
the inability to secure materials or transportation, then the party so affected shall be executed from any further performance for a period of time after the  
occurrence as may reasonably be necessary to remedy the effects of that occurrence, but in no event more than sixty (60) days. If any of the stated events  
should occur, Party A shall promptly notify Party B in writing as soon as commercially practicable, but in no event more than twenty (20) business days and  
provide documentation evidencing such occurrence. In no event shall the maximum liability of RubyTech under this warranty exceed the purchase price of  
the Product covered by this warranty.  
DISCLAIMER. EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY PROVIDED ABOVE AS REQUIRED “AS IS” AND THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES STATED ABOVE ARE  
EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS, ORAL OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, INCLUDING IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR THIRD PARTY RIGHTS ARE  
EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED.  
RUBYTECH SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT  
NOTICE: Please carefully read this Software License Agreement (hereinafter referred to as this “Agreement”) before copying or using the accompanying  
software or installing the hardware unit with pre-enabled software or firmware (each of which is referred to as “Software” in this Agreement). BY COPYING  
OR USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE PROVISIONS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE PROVISIONS EXPRESSED IN  
THIS AGREEMENT ARE THE ONLY PROVISION UNDER WHICH RUBYTECH WILL PERMIT YOU TO USE THE SOFTWARE. If you do not accept these  
provisions and conditions, please immediately return the unused software, manual and the related product. Written approval is NOT a prerequisite to the  
validity or enforceability of this Agreement and no solicitation of any such written approval by or on behalf of RubyTech shall be deemed as an inference to  
the contrary.  
LICENSE GRANT. The end user (hereinafter referred to as “Licensee”) of the Software is granted a personal, non-sublicensable, nonexclusive,  
nontransferable license by RubyTech Corporation (“RubyTech”): (1) To use the RubyTech’s software (“Software”) in object code form solely on a single  
central processing unit owned or leased by Licensee or otherwise embedded in the equipment offered by RubyTech. (2) To copy the Software only for  
backup purposes in support of authorized use of the Software. (3) To use and copy the documentation related to the Software solely in support of authorized  
use of the Software by Licensee. The License applies to the Software only except other RubyTech’s software or hardware products. Without the prior written  
consent of RubyTech, Licensee has no right to receive any source code or design documentation with respect to the Software.  
RESTRICTIONS ON USE; RESERVATION OF RIGHTS. The Software and related documentation are protected under copyright laws. RubyTech and/or its  
licensors retain all title and ownership in both the Software and its related documentation, including any revisions made by RubyTech. The copyright notice  
must be reproduced and included with any copy of any portion of the Software or related documentation. Except as expressly authorized above, Licensee  
shall not copy or transfer the Software or related documentation, in whole or in part. Licensee also shall not modify, translate, decompile, disassemble, use  
for any competitive analysis, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the Software, related documentation or any copy. The Software and  
related documentation embody RubyTech’s confidential and proprietary intellectual property. Licensee is not allowed to disclose the Software, or any  
information about the operation, design, performance or implementation of the Software and related documentation that is confidential to RubyTech to any  
third party. Software and related documentation may be delivered to you subject to export authorization required by governments of Taiwan and other  
countries. You agree that you will not export or re-export any Software or related documentation without the proper export licenses required by the  
governments of affected countries.  
LIMITED SOFTWARE WARRANTY. RubyTech warrants that any media on which the Software is recorded will be free from defects in materials under  
normal use for a period of twelve (12) months from date of shipment. If a defect in any such media should occur during the effective warranty period, the  
media may be returned to RubyTech, then RubyTech will replace the media. RubyTech shall not be responsible for the replacement of media if the failure of  
the media results from accident, abuse or misapplication of the media.  
EXCLUSIONS. The warranty as mentioned above does not apply to the Software, which (1) customer does not comply with the manual instructions offered  
by RubyTech in installation, operation, or maintenance, (2) Product fails due to damage from unusual external or electrical stress, shipment, storage,  
accident, abuse or misuse, (3) Product is used in an extra hazardous environment or activities, (4) any serial number on the Product has been removed or  
defaced, or (5) this warranty will be of no effect if the repair is via anyone other than RubyTech or the authorized agents. The maximum liability of RubyTech  
under this warranty is confined to the purchase price of the Product covered by this warranty.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DISCLAIMER. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED ABOVE, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS ” AND RUBYTECH AND ITS LICENSORS MAKE NO  
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REPSECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTAITON. RUBYTECH AND ITS LICENSORS DISCLAIM  
ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, INCLUSIVE OF WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. FURTHER, RUBYTECH DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE, OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS  
REGARDING THE USE, OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE, OF THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED WRITTEN DOCUMENTAITON IN TERMS OF  
CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE.  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL RUBYTECH OR ITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE OR ANY THIRD  
PARTY FOR (A) ANY MATTER BEYOND ITS REASONABLE CONTROL OR (B) ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR INCIDENTAL  
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR USE OF THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY RUBYTECH, EVEN IF RUBYTECH HAS BEEN NOTIFIED  
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN ADVANCE. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY OF RUBYTECH IN CONNECTION WITH THE  
SOFTWARE OR THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID TO RUBYTECH FOR THE LICENSE.  
TERM AND TERMINATION. The License is effective until terminated; however, all of the restrictions in regard to RubyTech’s copyright in the Software and  
related documentation will cease being effective at the date of expiration; Notwithstanding the termination or expiration of the term of this agreement, it is  
acknowledged and agreed that those obligations relating to use and disclosure of RubyTech’s confidential information shall survive. Licensee may terminate  
this License at any time by destroying the software together with all copies thereof. This License will be immediately terminated if Licensee fails to comply  
with any term and condition of the Agreement. Upon any termination of this License for any reason, Licensee shall discontinue to use the Software and shall  
destroy or return all copies of the Software and the related documentation.  
GENERAL. This License shall be governed by and construed pursuant to the laws of Taiwan. If any portion hereof is held to be invalid or unenforceable,  
the remaining provisions of this License shall remain in full force and effect. Neither the License nor this Agreement is assignable or transferable by  
Licensee without RubyTech’s prior written consent; any attempt to do so shall be void. This License constitutes the entire License between the parties with  
respect to the use of the Software.  
LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT LICENSEE HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTANDS IT, AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND  
CONDITIONS. LICENSEE FURTHER AGREES THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS THE ENTIRE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN RUBYTECH AND  
LICENSEE.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
CAUTION ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- VIII  
ELECTRONIC EMISSION NOTICES -------------------------------------------------------- VIII  
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION---------------------------------------------------------- 2  
1-1. OVERVIEW OF GS-2124C ------------------------------------------------------------ 2  
1-2. CHECKLIST------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4  
1-3. FEATURES-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4  
1-4. VIEW OF GS-2124C ------------------------------------------------------------------- 6  
1-4-1. User Interfaces on the Front Panel (Button, LEDs and Plugs) ----- 6  
1-4-2. User Interfaces on the Rear Panel----------------------------------------- 7  
1-5. VIEW OF THE OPTIONAL MODULES -------------------------------------------------- 8  
CHAPTER 2. INSTALLATION ----------------------------------------------------------- 9  
2-1. STARTING GS-2124C UP ------------------------------------------------------------- 9  
2-1-1. Hardware and Cable Installation-------------------------------------------- 9  
2-1-2. Cabling Requirements------------------------------------------------------- 10  
2-1-2-1. Cabling Requirements for TP Ports ---------------------------------11  
2-1-2-2. Cabling Requirements for 1000SX/LX SFP Module ------------11  
2-1-2-3. Switch Cascading in Topology--------------------------------------- 12  
2-1-3. Configuring the Management Agent of GS-2124C------------------- 15  
2-1-3-1. Configuring the Management Agent of GS-2124C through  
the Serial RS-232 Port ------------------------------------------------ 16  
2-1-3-2. Configuring the Management Agent of GS-2124C through  
the Ethernet Port-------------------------------------------------------- 18  
2-1-4. IP Address Assignment------------------------------------------------------ 19  
2-2. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS -------------------------------------------------------------- 24  
CHAPTER 3. OPERATION OF WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT-------------- 26  
3-1. WEB MANAGEMENT HOME OVERVIEW -------------------------------------------- 27  
3-1-1. System Information----------------------------------------------------------- 30  
3-1-2. IP Configuration --------------------------------------------------------------- 32  
3-1-3. Time Configuration ----------------------------------------------------------- 35  
3-1-4. Account Configuration ------------------------------------------------------- 38  
3-1-5. Management Policy ---------------------------------------------------------- 39  
3-2. PORT CONFIGURATION--------------------------------------------------------------- 42  
3-2-1.Port Status----------------------------------------------------------------------- 42  
3-2-2. Port Configuration ------------------------------------------------------------ 47  
3-2-3. Simple Counter---------------------------------------------------------------- 49  
3-2-4. Detail Counter ----------------------------------------------------------------- 51  
3-3. MIRROR -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54  
3-4. BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT --------------------------------------------------------- 55  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-5. QOS(QUALITY OF SERVICE) CONFIGURATION ----------------------------------- 57  
3-6. SNMP CONFIGURATION ------------------------------------------------------------- 67  
3-7. IGMP SNOOPING --------------------------------------------------------------------- 69  
3-8. MAX. PACKET LENGTH --------------------------------------------------------------- 71  
3-9. DHCP BOOT -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72  
3-10. VLAN --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 73  
3-10-1. VLAN Mode------------------------------------------------------------------- 73  
3-10-2. Tag-based Group------------------------------------------------------------ 76  
3-10-3. Port-based Group----------------------------------------------------------- 78  
3-10-4. Tag Rule ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 80  
3-11. MAC TABLE -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 82  
3-12. GVRP CONFIGURATION ----------------------------------------------------------- 89  
3-13. STP CONFIGURATION -------------------------------------------------------------- 95  
3-13-1. STP Status -------------------------------------------------------------------- 95  
3-13-2. STP Configuration ---------------------------------------------------------- 97  
3-13-3. STP Port Configuration---------------------------------------------------- 99  
3-14. TRUNKING CONFIGURATION ------------------------------------------------------102  
3-15. 802.1X CONFIGURATION----------------------------------------------------------109  
3-16. ALARM CONFIGURATION ----------------------------------------------------------119  
3-17. CONFIGURATION--------------------------------------------------------------------122  
3-17-1. Save/Restore----------------------------------------------------------------123  
3-17-2. Config File--------------------------------------------------------------------125  
3-18. DIAGNOSTICS -----------------------------------------------------------------------126  
3-19. TFTP SERVER----------------------------------------------------------------------129  
3-20. LOG-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------130  
3-21. FIRMWARE UPGRADE--------------------------------------------------------------132  
3-22. REBOOT -----------------------------------------------------------------------------133  
3-23. LOGOUT------------------------------------------------------------------------------134  
CHAPTER 4. OPERATION OF CLI MANAGEMENT---------------------------135  
4-1. CLI MANAGEMENT-------------------------------------------------------------------135  
4-1-1. Login ----------------------------------------------------------------------------135  
4-2. COMMANDS OF CLI------------------------------------------------------------------137  
4-2-1. Global Commands of CLI--------------------------------------------------138  
4-2-2. Local Commands of CLI ---------------------------------------------------144  
CHAPTER 5. MAINTENANCE--------------------------------------------------------218  
5-1. RESOLVING NO LINK CONDITION--------------------------------------------------218  
5-2. Q&A -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------218  
APPENDIX A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS -----------------------------------219  
APPENDIX B NULL MODEM CABLE SPECIFICATIONS---------------------223  
APPENDIX C MIB SPECIFICATIONS-----------------------------------------------224  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Revision History  
Release  
Date  
Revision  
0.98  
06/06/2005  
A1  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution  
Circuit devices are sensitive to static electricity, which can damage their delicate  
electronics. Dry weather conditions or walking across a carpeted floor may cause you to  
acquire a static electrical charge.  
To protect your device, always:  
Touch the metal chassis of your computer to ground the static electrical charge before  
you pick up the circuit device.  
Pick up the device by holding it on the left and right edges only.  
Electronic Emission Notices  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A  
computing device pursuant to Subpart J of part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial  
environment.  
European Community (CE) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the protection requirements  
of European Emission Standard EN55022/EN60555-2 and the Generic European Immunity  
Standard EN50082-1.  
EMC:  
EN55022(1988)/CISPR-22(1985) class A  
EN60555-2(1995)  
EN60555-3  
class A  
IEC1000-4-2(1995)  
IEC1000-4-3(1995)  
IEC1000-4-4(1995)  
4K V CD, 8KV, AD  
3V/m  
1KV – (power line), 0.5KV – (signal line)  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this user’s manual  
In this user’s manual, it will not only tell you how to install and connect your  
network system but configure and monitor the GS-2124C through the built-in CLI  
and web by RS-232 serial interface and Ethernet ports step-by-step. Many  
explanation in detail of hardware and software functions are shown as well as the  
examples of the operation for web-based interface and command-line interface  
(CLI).  
Overview of this user’s manual  
Chapter 1 “Introduction” describes the features of GS-2124C  
Chapter 2 “Installation”  
Chapter 3 “Operation of Web-based Management”  
Chapter 4 “Operation of CLI Management”  
Chapter 5 “Maintenance”  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
1. Introduction  
1-1. Overview of GS-2124C  
GS-2124C, a 24-port Gigabit L2 Managed Switch, is a standard switch that  
meets all IEEE 802.3/u/x/z Gigabit, Fast Ethernet specifications. The switch  
included 22-Port 10/100/1000Mbps TP and 2-Port Gigabit TP/SFP Fiber  
management Ethernet switch. The switch can be managed through RS-232 serial  
port via directly connection, or through Ethernet port using CLI or Web-based  
management unit, associated with SNMP agent. With the SNMP agent, the network  
administrator can logon the switch to monitor, configure and control each port’s  
activity in a friendly way. The overall network management is enhanced and the  
network efficiency is also improved to accommodate high bandwidth applications. In  
addition, the switch features comprehensive and useful function such as QoS  
(Quality of Service), Spanning Tree, VLAN, Port Trunking, Bandwidth Control, Port  
Security, SNMP/RMON, IGMP Snooping capability via the intelligent software. It is  
suitable for both metro-LAN and office application.  
In this switch, Port 23, 24 includes two types of media --- TP and SFP Fiber  
(LC, BiDi LC…); this port supports 10/100/1000Mbps TP or 1000Mbps SFP Fiber  
with auto-detected function. 1000Mbps SFP Fiber transceiver is used for high-  
speed connection expansion.  
1000Mbps LC, Multi-Mode, SFP Fiber transceiver  
1000Mbps LC, 10km, SFP Fiber transceiver  
1000Mbps LC, 30km, SFP Fiber transceiver  
1000Mbps LC, 50km, SFP Fiber transceiver  
1000Mbps BiDi LC, 20km, 1550nm SFP Fiber WDM transceiver  
1000Mbps BiDi LC, 20km, 1310nm SFP Fiber WDM transceiver  
10/100/1000Mbps TP is a standard Ethernet port that meets all IEEE  
802.3/u/x/z Gigabit, Fast Ethernet specifications. 1000Mbps SFP Fiber transceiver  
is a Gigabit Ethernet port that fully complies with all IEEE 802.3z and 1000Base-  
SX/LX standards.  
1000Mbps Single Fiber WDM (BiDi) transceiver is designed with an optic  
Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM) technology that transports bi-directional  
full duplex signal over a single fiber simultaneously.  
For upgrading firmware, please refer to the Section 3-21 or Section 4-2-2 for  
more details. The switch will not stop operating while upgrading firmware and after  
that, the configuration keeps unchanged.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Key Features in the Device  
QoS:  
Support Quality of Service by the IEEE 802.1P standard. There are two  
priority queue and packet transmission schedule using Weighted Round  
Robin (WRR). User-defined weight classification of packet priority can be  
based on either a VLAN tag on packet or a user-defined port priority.  
Spanning Tree:  
Support IEEE 802.1D, IEEE 802.1w (RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree  
Protocol) and IEEE 802.1s (MSTP: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol)  
standards.  
VLAN:  
Support Port-based VLAN and IEEE802.1Q Tag VLAN. Support 256 active  
VLANs and VLAN ID 1~4094.  
Port Trunking:  
Support static port trunking and port trunking with IEEE 802.3ad LACP.  
Bandwidth Control:  
Support ingress and egress per port bandwidth control.  
Port Security:  
Support allowed, denied forwarding and port security with MAC address.  
SNMP/RMON:  
SNMP agent and RMON MIB. In the device, SNMP agent is a client  
software which is operating over SNMP protocol used to receive the  
command from SNMP manager (server site) and echo the corresponded  
data, i.e. MIB object. Besides, SNMP agent will actively issue TRAP  
information when happened.  
RMON is the abbreviation of Remote Network Monitoring and is a branch of  
the SNMP MIB.  
The device supports MIB-2 (RFC 1213), Bridge MIB (RFC 1493), RMON  
MIB (RFC 1757)-statistics Group 1,2,3,9, VLAN MIB (802.1Q, RFC2674),  
Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643) and so on.  
IGMP Snooping:  
Support IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236): The function IGMP snooping is used  
to establish the multicast groups to forward the multicast packet to the  
member ports, and, in nature, avoid wasting the bandwidth while IP  
multicast packets are running over the network.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
1-2. Checklist  
Before you start installing the switch, verify that the package contains the  
following:  
GS-2124C 24 Gigabit L2 Managed Switch  
Modules (optional)  
Mounting Accessory (for 19” Rack Shelf)  
This User's Manual in CD-ROM  
AC Power Cord  
RS-232 Cable  
Please notify your sales representative immediately if any of the aforementioned  
items is missing or damaged.  
1-3. Features  
The GS-2124C,  
a
standalone off-the-shelf switch, provides the  
comprehensive features listed below for users to perform system network  
administration and efficiently and securely serve your network.  
Hardware  
22 10/100/1000Mbps Auto-negotiation Gigabit Ethernet TP ports  
2 10/100/1000Mbps TP or 1000Mbps SFP Fiber dual media auto sense  
400KB on-chip frame buffer  
Jumbo frame support  
Programmable classifier for QoS (Layer 4/Multimedia)  
8K MAC address and 4K VLAN support (IEEE802.1Q)  
Per-port shaping, policing, and Broadcast Storm Control  
IEEE802.1Q-in-Q nested VLAN support  
Full-duplex flow control (IEEE802.3x) and half-duplex backpressure  
Extensive front-panel diagnostic LEDs; System: Power, TP Port1-24: LINK/ACT,  
10/100/1000Mbps, SFP Port 23,24: SFP(LINK/ACT)  
Management  
Supports concisely the status of port and easily port configuration  
Supports per port traffic monitoring counters  
Supports a snapshot of the system Information when you login  
Supports port mirror function  
Supports the static trunk function  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Supports 802.1Q VLAN  
Supports user management and limits three users to login  
Maximal packet length can be up to 9216 bytes for jumbo frame application  
Supports DHCP Broadcasting Suppression to avoid network suspended or  
crashed  
Supports to send the trap event while monitored events happened  
Supports default configuration which can be restored to overwrite the current  
configuration which is working on via web browser and CLI  
Supports on-line plug/unplug SFP modules  
Supports Quality of Service (QoS) for real time applications based on the  
information taken from Layer 2 to Layer 4, such as VoIP  
Built-in web-based management and CLI management, providing a more  
convenient UI for the user  
Supports port mirror function with ingress traffic  
Supports rapid spanning tree (802.1w RSTP)  
Supports 802.1x port security on a VLAN  
Supports user management and only first login administrator can configure the  
device. The rest of users can only view the switch  
SNMP access can be disabled and prevent from illegal SNMP access  
Maximal packet length can be up to 9216 bytes  
Supports Ingress, Non-unicast and Egress Bandwidth rating management with  
a resolution of 1Mbps  
The trap event and alarm message can be transferred via e-mail and mobile  
phone short message  
Supports diagnostics to let administrator knowing the hardware status  
Supports external loopback test to check if the link is ok  
TFTP for firmware upgrade, system log upload and config file import/export  
Supports remote boot the device through user interface and SNMP  
Supports network time synchronization and daylight saving  
Supports 120 event log records in the main memory and display on the local  
console  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
1-4. View of GS-2124C  
Fig. 1-1 Full View of 24 Gigabit L2 Managed Switch  
1-4-1. User Interfaces on the Front Panel (Button, LEDs and Plugs)  
There are 24 TP Gigabit Ethernet ports and 2 SFP fiber ports for optional  
removable modules on the front panel of the switch. LED display area, locating on  
the left side of the panel, contains a Power LED, which indicates the power status  
and 24 ports working status of the switch.  
Gigabit Ethernet Port  
SFP Fiber Port  
TP Port Status Indication LEDs  
Power Indication LED  
Fiber Port Status Indication LEDs  
RESET Button:  
RESET button is used to  
initialize or reset the  
management system.  
Fig. 1-2 Front View of 24 Gigabit L2 Managed Switch  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
LED Indicators  
LED  
Color  
Function  
System LED  
POWER  
CPU LED  
Green Lit when +5V DC power is on and good  
Green Blinks when CPU is activity  
10/100/1000Ethernet TP Port 1 to 24 LED  
Lit when connection with remote device is good  
Green Blinks when any traffic is present  
Off when cable connection is not good  
LINK/ACT  
Lit green when 1000Mbps speed is active  
Lit ember when 100Mbps speed is active  
Off when 10Mbps speed is active  
1000SX/LX Gigabit Fiber Port 23, 24 LED  
Lit when connection with the remote device is good  
Green/  
10/100/1000Mbps Ember  
SFP(LINK/ACT) Green Blinks when any traffic is present  
Off when module connection is not good  
Table1-1  
1-4-2. User Interfaces on the Rear Panel  
One RS-232 DB-9 interface is offered for configuration or management.  
AC Line 100-240V 50/60 Hz  
RS-232 DB-9 Connector  
Fig. 1-3 Rear View of 24 Gigabit L2 Managed Switch  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
1-5. View of the Optional Modules  
In the switch, Port 23~24 includes two types of media --- TP and SFP Fiber  
(LC, BiDi LC…); this port supports 10/100/1000Mbps TP or 1000Mbps SFP Fiber  
with auto-detected function. 1000Mbps SFP Fiber transceiver is used for high-  
speed connection expansion; nine optional SFP types provided for the switch are  
listed below:  
1000Mbps LC, MM, SFP Fiber transceiver (SFP.0LC.202)  
1000Mbps LC, SM 10km, SFP Fiber transceiver (SFP.0LC.212.10)  
1000Mbps LC, SM 30km, SFP Fiber transceiver (SFP.0LC.212.30)  
1000Mbps LC, SM 50km, SFP Fiber transceiver (SFP.0LC.212.50)  
1000Mbps BiDi LC, type 1, SM 20km, SFP Fiber WDM transceiver  
(SFP.0BL.621.201)  
1000Mbps BiDi LC, type 2, SM 20km, SFP Fiber WDM transceiver  
(SFP.0BL.621.202)  
1000Mbps LC, SM 10km, SFP Fiber transceiver with DDM  
(SFP.DLC.212.10)  
Fig. 1-4 Front View of 1000Base-SX/LX LC, SFP Fiber Transceiver  
Fig. 1-5 Front View of 1000Base-LX BiDi LC, SFP Fiber Transceiver  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
2. Installation  
2-1. Starting GS-2124C Up  
This section will give users a quick start for:  
- Hardware and Cable Installation  
- Management Station Installation  
- Software booting and configuration  
2-1-1. Hardware and Cable Installation  
At the beginning, please do first:  
Wear a grounding device to avoid the damage from electrostatic discharge  
Be sure that power switch is OFF before you insert the power cord to power  
source  
Installing Optional SFP Fiber Transceivers to the GS-2124C  
Note: If you have no modules, please skip this section.  
Fig. 2-1 Installation of Optional SFP Fiber Transceiver  
Connecting the SFP Module to the Chassis:  
The optional SFP modules are hot swappable, so you can plug or unplug it  
before or after powering on.  
1. Verify that the SFP module is the right model and conforms to the chassis  
2. Slide the module along the slot. Also be sure that the module is properly  
seated against the slot socket/connector  
3. Install the media cable for network connection  
4. Repeat the above steps, as needed, for each module to be installed into  
slot(s)  
5. Have the power ON after the above procedures are done  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
TP Port and Cable Installation  
In the switch, TP port supports MDI/MDI-X auto-crossover, so both types of  
cable, straight-through (Cable pin-outs for RJ-45 jack 1, 2, 3, 6 to 1, 2, 3, 6 in  
10/100M TP; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 in Gigabit TP) and  
crossed-over (Cable pin-outs for RJ-45 jack 1, 2, 3, 6 to 3, 6, 1, 2) can be used.  
It means you do not have to tell from them, just plug it.  
Use Cat. 5 grade RJ-45 TP cable to connect to a TP port of the switch and the  
other end is connected to a network-aware device such as a workstation or a  
server.  
Repeat the above steps, as needed, for each RJ-45 port to be connected to a  
Gigabit 10/100/1000 TP device.  
Now, you can start having the switch in operation.  
Power On  
The switch supports 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz power supply. The power  
supply will automatically convert the local AC power source to DC power. It does not  
matter whether any connection plugged into the switch or not when power on, even  
modules as well. After the power is on, all LED indicators will light up immediately  
and then all off except the power LED still keeps on. This represents a reset of the  
system.  
Firmware Loading  
After resetting, the bootloader will load the firmware into the memory. It will  
take about 30 seconds, after that, the switch will flash all the LED once and  
automatically performs self-test and is in ready state.  
2-1-2. Cabling Requirements  
To help ensure a successful installation and keep the network performance  
good, please take a care on the cabling requirement. Cables with worse  
specification will render the LAN to work poorly.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
2-1-2-1. Cabling Requirements for TP Ports  
For Fast Ethernet TP network connection  
The grade of the cable must be Cat. 5 or Cat. 5e with a maximum length of  
100 meters.  
Gigabit Ethernet TP network connection  
The grade of the cable must be Cat. 5 or Cat. 5e with a maximum length of  
100 meters. Cat. 5e is recommended.  
2-1-2-2. Cabling Requirements for 1000SX/LX SFP Module  
It is more complex and comprehensive contrast to TP cabling in the fiber  
media. Basically, there are two categories of fiber, multi mode (MM) and single  
mode (SM). The later is categorized into several classes by the distance it supports.  
They are SX, LX, LHX, XD, and ZX. From the viewpoint of connector type, there  
mainly are LC and BIDI LC.  
Gigabit Fiber with multi-mode LC SFP module  
Gigabit Fiber with single-mode LC SFP module  
Gigabit Fiber with BiDi LC 1310nm SFP module  
Gigabit Fiber with BiDi LC 1550nm SFP module  
The following table lists the types of fiber that we support and those else not  
listed here are available upon request.  
Multi-mode Fiber Cable and Modal Bandwidth  
Multi-mode 62.5/125µm  
Multi-mode 50/125µm  
IEEE 802.3z  
Gigabit Ethernet  
1000SX 850nm  
Modal  
Modal  
Distance  
Bandwidth  
Distance  
Bandwidth  
160MHz-Km  
200MHz-Km  
220m  
275m  
400MHz-Km  
500m  
550m  
500MHz-Km  
Single-mode Fiber 9/125µm  
1000Base-  
LX/LHX/XD/ZX  
Single-mode transceiver 1310nm 10Km  
Single-mode transceiver 1550nm 30, 50Km  
TX(Transmit) 1310nm  
RX(Receive) 1550nm  
TX(Transmit) 1550nm  
RX(Receive) 1310nm  
Single-Mode  
*20Km  
1000Base-LX  
Single Fiber  
(BIDI LC)  
Single-Mode  
*20Km  
Table2-1  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
2-1-2-3. Switch Cascading in Topology  
Takes the Delay Time into Account  
Theoretically, the switch partitions the collision domain for each port in switch  
cascading that you may up-link the switches unlimitedly. In practice, the network  
extension (cascading levels & overall diameter) must follow the constraint of the  
IEEE 802.3/802.3u/802.3z and other 802.1 series protocol specifications, in which  
the limitations are the timing requirement from physical signals defined by 802.3  
series specification of Media Access Control (MAC) and PHY, and timer from some  
OSI layer 2 protocols such as 802.1d, 802.1q, LACP and so on.  
The fiber, TP cables and devices’ bit-time delay (round trip) are as follows:  
1000Base-X TP, Fiber  
100Base-TX TP  
100Base-FX Fiber  
Round trip Delay: 4096  
Round trip Delay: 512  
Cat. 5 TP Wire:  
Fiber Cable  
11.12/m  
10.10/m  
Cat. 5 TP Wire: 1.12/m  
TP to fiber Converter: 56  
Fiber Cable:  
1.0/m  
:
Bit Time unit : 1ns (1sec./1000 Mega bit)  
Bit Time unit: 0.01µs (1sec./100 Mega bit)  
Table 2-2  
Sum up all elements’ bit-time delay and the overall bit-time delay of  
wires/devices must be within Round Trip Delay (bit times) in a half-duplex network  
segment (collision domain). For full-duplex operation, this will not be applied. You  
may use the TP-Fiber module to extend the TP node distance over fiber optic and  
provide the long haul connection.  
Typical Network Topology in Deployment  
A hierarchical network with minimum levels of switch may reduce the timing  
delay between server and client station. Basically, with this approach, it will  
minimize the number of switches in any one path; will lower the possibility of  
network loop and will improve network efficiency. If more than two switches are  
connected in the same network, select one switch as Level 1 switch and connect all  
other switches to it at Level 2. Server/Host is recommended to connect to the Level  
1 switch. This is general if no VLAN or other special requirements are applied.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Case1: All switch ports are in the same local area network. Every port can access  
each other (See Fig. 2-2).  
Fig. 2-2 No VLAN Configuration Diagram  
If VLAN is enabled and configured, each node in the network that can  
communicate each other directly is bounded in the same VLAN area.  
Here VLAN area is defined by what VLAN you are using. The switch  
supports both port-based VLAN and tag-based VLAN. They are different in practical  
deployment, especially in physical location. The following diagram shows how it  
works and what the difference they are.  
Case2a: Port-based VLAN (See Fig.2-3).  
Fig. 2-3 Port-based VLAN Diagram  
1. The same VLAN members could not be in different switches.  
2. Every VLAN members could not access VLAN members each other.  
3. The switch manager has to assign different names for each VLAN groups  
at one switch.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Case 2b: Port-based VLAN (See Fig.2-4).  
Fig. 2-4 Port-based VLAN Diagram  
1. VLAN1 members could not access VLAN2, VLAN3 and VLAN4 members.  
2. VLAN2 members could not access VLAN1 and VLAN3 members, but they could  
access VLAN4 members.  
3. VLAN3 members could not access VLAN1, VLAN2 and VLAN4.  
4. VLAN4 members could not access VLAN1 and VLAN3 members, but they could  
access VLAN2 members.  
Case3a: The same VLAN members can be at different switches with the same VID  
(See Fig. 2-5).  
Fig. 2-5 Attribute-based VLAN Diagram  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
2-1-3. Configuring the Management Agent of GS-2124C  
We offer you three ways to startup the switch management function. They  
are RS-232 console, CLI, and Web. Users can use any one of them to monitor and  
configure the switch. You can touch them through the following procedures.  
Section 2-1-3-1: Configuring the Management Agent of GS-2124C through the  
Serial RS-232 Port  
Section 2-1-3-2: Configuring the Management Agent of GS-2124C through the  
Ethernet Port  
Note: Please first modify the IP address, Subnet mask, Default gateway and DNS  
through RS-232 console, and then do the next.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
2-1-3-1. Configuring the Management Agent of GS-2124C through the Serial  
RS-232 Port  
To perform the configuration through RS-232 console port, the switch’s serial  
port must be directly connected to a DCE device, for example, a PC, through  
RS-232 cable with DB-9 connector. Next, run a terminal emulator with the default  
setting of the switch’s serial port. With this, you can communicate with the switch.  
In the switch, RS-232 interface only supports baud rate 57.6k bps with 8 data  
bits, 1 stop bit, no parity check and no flow control.  
RS-232 DB-9 Connector  
AC Line 100-240V 50/60 Hz  
RS-232  
24 Gigabit L2 Managed Switch  
Default IP Setting:  
IP address = 192.168.1.1  
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.254  
RS-232 cable with female  
DB-9 connector at both ends  
Fig. 2-6  
Terminal or Terminal Emulator  
To configure the switch, please follow the procedures below:  
1. Find the RS-232 DB-9 cable with female DB-9 connector bundled.  
Normally, it just uses pins 2, 3 and 7. See also Appendix B for more  
details on Null Modem Cable Specifications.  
2. Attaches the DB-9 female cable connector to the male serial RS-232  
DB-9 connector on the switch.  
3. Attaches the other end of the serial RS-232 DB-9 cable to PC’s serial  
port, running a terminal emulator supporting VT100/ANSI terminal with  
The switch’s serial port default settings. For example,  
Windows98/2000/XP HyperTerminal utility.  
Note: The switch’s serial port default settings are listed as follows:  
Baud rate  
Stop bits  
Data bits  
Parity  
57600  
1
8
N
Flow control  
none  
4. When you complete the connection, then press <Enter> key. The login  
prompt will be shown on the screen. The default username and  
password are shown as below:  
Username = admin  
Password = admin  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Set IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway IP Address  
Please refer to Fig. 2-6 Console Management for details about the ex-factory  
setting. They are default setting of IP address. You can first either configure your PC  
IP address or change IP address of the switch, next to change the IP address of  
default gateway and subnet mask.  
For example, your network address is 10.1.1.0, and subnet mask is  
255.255.255.0. You can change the switch’s default IP address 192.168.1.1 to  
10.1.1.1 and set the subnet mask to be 255.255.255.0. Then, choose your default  
gateway, may be it is 10.1.1.254.  
Default Value  
IP Address  
GS-2124C  
Your Network Setting  
192.168.1.1  
10.1.1.1  
Subnet  
255.255.255.0  
192.168.1.254  
255.255.255.0  
10.1.1.254  
Default Gateway  
Table 2-3  
After completing these settings in the switch, it will reboot to have the  
configuration taken effect. After this step, you can operate the management through  
the network, no matter it is from a web browser or Network Management System  
(NMS).  
Fig. 2-7 the Login Screen for CLI  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
2-1-3-2. Configuring the Management Agent of GS-2124C through the Ethernet  
Port  
There are three ways to configure and monitor the switch through the  
switch’s Ethernet port. They are CLI, Web browser and SNMP manager. The user  
interface for the last one is NMS dependent and does not cover here. We just  
introduce the first two types of management interface.  
24 Gigabit L2 Managed Switch  
Default IP Setting:  
IP = 192.168.1.1  
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.254  
Assign a reasonable IP address,  
For example:  
IP = 192.168.1.100  
Ethernet LAN  
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway = 192.168.1.254  
Fig. 2-8  
Managing GS-2124C through Ethernet port  
Before you communicate with the switch, you have to finish first the  
configuration of the IP address or to know the IP address of the switch. Then,  
follow the procedures listed below.  
1. Set up a physical path between the configured the switch and a PC by a  
qualified UTP Cat. 5 cable with RJ-45 connector.  
Note: If PC directly connects to the switch, you have to setup the same  
subnet mask between them. But, subnet mask may be different for the PC  
in the remote site. Please refer to Fig. 2-8 about the switch’s default IP  
address information.  
2. Run CLI or web browser and follow the menu. Please refer to Chapter 3  
and Chapter 4.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Fig. 2-9 the Login Screen for Web  
2-1-4. IP Address Assignment  
For IP address configuration, there are three parameters needed to be filled  
in. They are IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS.  
IP address:  
The address of the network device in the network is used for internetworking  
communication. Its address structure looks is shown in the Fig. 2-10. It is “classful”  
because it is split into predefined address classes or categories.  
Each class has its own network range between the network identifier and  
host identifier in the 32 bits address. Each IP address comprises two parts: network  
identifier (address) and host identifier (address). The former indicates the network  
where the addressed host resides, and the latter indicates the individual host in the  
network which the address of host refers to. And the host identifier must be unique  
in the same LAN. Here the term of IP address we used is version 4, known as IPv4.  
32 bits  
Network identifier  
Host identifier  
Fig. 2-10 IP address structure  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
With the classful addressing, it divides IP address into three classes, class A,  
class B and class C. The rest of IP addresses are for multicast and broadcast. The  
bit length of the network prefix is the same as that of the subnet mask and is  
denoted as IP address/X, for example, 192.168.1.0/24. Each class has its address  
range described below.  
Class A:  
Address is less than 126.255.255.255. There are a total of 126 networks can  
be defined because the address 0.0.0.0 is reserved for default route and  
127.0.0.0/8 is reserved for loopback function.  
Bit # 0 1  
7 8  
31  
0
Network address  
Host address  
Class B:  
IP address range between 128.0.0.0 and 191.255.255.255. Each class B  
network has a 16-bit network prefix followed 16-bit host address. There are 16,384  
(2^14)/16 networks able to be defined with a maximum of 65534 (2^16 –2) hosts  
per network.  
Bit # 01 2  
15 16  
31  
10  
Network address  
Host address  
Class C:  
IP address range between 192.0.0.0 and 223.255.255.255. Each class C  
network has a 24-bit network prefix followed 8-bit host address. There are  
2,097,152 (2^21)/24 networks able to be defined with a maximum of 254 (2^8 –2)  
hosts per network.  
Bit # 0 1 2 3  
23 24  
31  
110  
Network address  
Host address  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Class D and E:  
Class D is a class with first 4 MSB (Most significance bit) set to 1-1-1-0 and  
is used for IP Multicast. See also RFC 1112. Class E is a class with first 4 MSB set  
to 1-1-1-1 and is used for IP broadcast.  
According to IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority), there are three  
specific IP address blocks reserved and able to be used for extending internal  
network. We call it Private IP address and list below:  
Class A  
Class B  
Class C  
10.0.0.0 --- 10.255.255.255  
172.16.0.0 --- 172.31.255.255  
192.168.0.0 --- 192.168.255.255  
Please refer to RFC 1597 and RFC 1466 for more information.  
Subnet mask:  
It means the sub-division of a class-based network or a CIDR block. The  
subnet is used to determine how to split an IP address to the network prefix and the  
host address in bitwise basis. It is designed to utilize IP address more efficiently and  
ease to manage IP network.  
For a class B network, 128.1.2.3, it may have a subnet mask 255.255.0.0 in  
default, in which the first two bytes is with all 1s. This means more than 60  
thousands of nodes in flat IP address will be at the same network. It’s too large to  
manage practically. Now if we divide it into smaller network by extending network  
prefix from 16 bits to, say 24 bits, that’s using its third byte to subnet this class B  
network. Now it has a subnet mask 255.255.255.0, in which each bit of the first  
three bytes is 1. It’s now clear that the first two bytes is used to identify the class B  
network, the third byte is used to identify the subnet within this class B network and,  
of course, the last byte is the host number.  
Not all IP address is available in the sub-netted network. Two special  
addresses are reserved. They are the addresses with all zero’s and all one’s host  
number. For example, an IP address 128.1.2.128, what IP address reserved will be  
looked like? All 0s mean the network itself, and all 1s mean IP broadcast.  
128.1.2.128/25  
Network  
Subnet  
10000000.00000001.00000010.1 0000000  
25 bits  
All 0s = 128.1.2.128  
All 1s= 128.1.2.255  
1 0000000  
1 1111111  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
In this diagram, you can see the subnet mask with 25-bit long,  
255.255.255.128, contains 126 members in the sub-netted network. Another is that  
the length of network prefix equals the number of the bit with 1s in that subnet mask.  
With this, you can easily count the number of IP addresses matched. The following  
table shows the result.  
Prefix Length No. of IP matched No. of Addressable IP  
/32  
/31  
/30  
/29  
/28  
/27  
/26  
/25  
/24  
/23  
/22  
/21  
/20  
/19  
/18  
/17  
/16  
1
2
-
-
4
2
8
6
16  
14  
32  
30  
64  
62  
128  
256  
512  
1024  
2048  
4096  
8192  
16384  
32768  
65536  
126  
254  
510  
1022  
2046  
4094  
8190  
16382  
32766  
65534  
Table 2-4  
According to the scheme above, a subnet mask 255.255.255.0 will partition a  
network with the class C. It means there will have a maximum of 254 effective  
nodes existed in this sub-netted network and is considered a physical network in an  
autonomous network. So it owns a network IP address which may looks like  
168.1.2.0.  
With the subnet mask, a bigger network can be cut into small pieces of  
network. If we want to have more than two independent networks in a worknet, a  
partition to the network must be performed. In this case, subnet mask must be  
applied.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
For different network applications, the subnet mask may look like  
255.255.255.240. This means it is a small network accommodating a maximum of  
15 nodes in the network.  
Default gateway:  
For the routed packet, if the destination is not in the routing table, all the  
traffic is put into the device with the designated IP address, known as default router.  
Basically, it is a routing policy. The gateway setting is used for Trap Events Host  
only in the switch.  
For assigning an IP address to the switch, you just have to check what the IP  
address of the network will be connected with the switch. Use the same network  
address and append your host address to it.  
Fig. 2-11  
First, IP Address: as shown in the Fig. 2-11, enter “192.168.1.1”, for instance.  
For sure, an IP address such as 192.168.1.x must be set on your PC.  
Second, Subnet Mask: as shown in the Fig. 2-11, enter “255.255.255.0”. Any  
subnet mask such as 255.255.255.x is allowable in this case.  
DNS:  
The Domain Name Server translates human readable machine name to IP  
address. Every machine on the Internet has a unique IP address. A server generally  
has a static IP address. To connect to a server, the client needs to know the IP of  
the server. However, user generally uses the name to connect to the server. Thus,  
the switch DNS client program (such as a browser) will ask the DNS to resolve the  
IP address of the named server.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
2-2. Typical Applications  
The GS-2124C implements 24 Gigabit Ethernet TP ports with auto MDIX and  
two slots for the removable module supporting comprehensive fiber types of  
connection, including LC and BiDi-LC SFP modules. For more details on the  
specification of the switch, please refer to Appendix A.  
The switch is suitable for the following applications.  
Central Site/Remote site application is used in carrier or ISP (See Fig. 2-12)  
Peer-to-peer application is used in two remote offices (See Fig. 2-13)  
Office network(See Fig. 2-14)  
Central Site  
Fig. 2-12 Network Connection between Remote Site and Central Site  
Fig. 2-12 is a system wide basic reference connection diagram. This diagram  
demonstrates how the switch connects with other network devices and hosts.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Fig. 2-13 Peer-to-peer Network Connection  
Fig. 2-14 Office Network Connection  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3. Operation of  
Web-based Management  
This chapter instructs you how to configure and manage the GS-2124C  
through the web user interface it supports, to access and manage the 22-Port  
10/100/1000Mbps TP and 2-Port Gigabit TP/SFP Fiber management Ethernet  
switch. With this facility, you can easily access and monitor through any one port of  
the switch all the status of the switch, including MIBs status, each port activity,  
Spanning tree status, port aggregation status, multicast traffic, VLAN and priority  
status, even illegal access record and so on.  
The default values of the managed switch are listed in the table below:  
IP Address  
192.168.1.1  
Subnet Mask  
255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway 192.168.1.254  
Username  
Password  
admin  
admin  
Table 3-1  
After the managed switch has been finished configuration in the CLI via the  
switch’s serial interface, you can browse it. For instance, type http://192.168.1.1 in  
the address row in a browser, it will show the following screen (see Fig.3-1) and ask  
you inputting username and password in order to login and access authentication.  
The default username and password are both “admin”. For the first time to use,  
please enter the default username and password, then click the <Login> button.  
The login process now is completed.  
In this login menu, you have to input the complete username and password  
respectively, the switch will not give you a shortcut to username automatically. This  
looks inconvenient, but safer.  
In the switch, it supports a simple user management function allowing only  
one administrator to configure the system at the same time. If there are two or more  
users using administrator’s identity, the switch will allow the only one who logins first  
to configure the system. The rest of users, even with administrator’s identity, can  
only monitor the system. For those who have no administrator’s identity, can only  
monitor the system. There are only a maximum of three users able to login  
simultaneously in the switch.  
To optimize the display effect, we recommend you use Microsoft IE 6.0  
above, Netscape V7.1 above or FireFox V1.00 above and have the resolution  
1024x768. The switch supported neutral web browser interface.  
Here is the whole function tree with web user interface and we will travel it  
through this chapter.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Fig. 3-1  
3-1. Web Management Home Overview  
After you login, the switch shows you the system information as Fig. 3-2. This  
page is default and tells you the basic information of the system, including “Model  
Name”, “System Description”, “Location”, “Contact”, “Device Name”, “System Up  
Time”, “Current Time”, “BIOS Version”, “Firmware Version”, “Hardware-Mechanical  
Version”, “Series Number”, “Host IP Address”, “Host Mac Address”, “Device Port”,  
“RAM Size” and “Flash Size”. With this information, you will know the software  
version used, MAC address, serial number, how many ports good and so on. This is  
helpful while malfunctioning.  
Fig. 3-2  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
The Information of Page Layout  
On the top side, it shows the front panel of the switch. In the front panel, the  
linked ports will display green; as to the ports, which are link off, they will be  
dark. For the optional modules, the slot will show only a cover plate if no  
module exists and will show a module if a module is present. The image of  
module depends on the one you inserted. The same, if disconnected, the port  
will show just dark, if linked, green.  
In this device, there are clicking functions on the panel provided for the  
information of the ports. These are very convenient functions for browsing the  
information of a single port. When clicking the port on the front panel, an  
information window for the port will be pop out. (See Fig. 3-3)  
Fig. 3-3 Port status information  
In Fig. 3-3, it shows the basic information of the clicked port. With this, you’ll  
see the information about the port status, traffic status and bandwidth rating for  
egress and ingress respectively.  
On the left-top corner, there is a pull-down list for Auto Logout. For the sake of  
security, we provide auto-logout function to protect you from illegal user as you  
are leaving. If you do not choose any selection in Auto Logout list, it means  
you turn on the Auto Logout function and the system will be logged out  
automatically when no action on the device 3 minutes later. If OFF is chosen,  
the screen will keep as it is. Default is ON.  
On the left side, the main menu tree for web is listed in the page. They are  
hierarchical menu. Open the function folder, a sub-menu will be shown. The  
functions of each folder are described in its corresponded section respectively.  
When clicking it, the function is performed. The following list is the full function  
tree for web user interface.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Root  
System  
Port  
Mirror  
Bandwidth  
SNMP  
QoS  
IGMP Snooping  
DHCP Boot  
MAC Table  
STP  
Max. Packet Length  
VLAN  
GVRP  
Trunk  
802.1x  
Alarm  
Configuration  
TFTP Server  
Firmware Upgrade  
Logout  
Diagnostics  
Log  
Reboot  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-1-1. System Information  
Function name:  
System Information  
Function description:  
Show the basic system information.  
Parameter description:  
Model name:  
The model name of this device.  
System description:  
As it is, this tells what this device is. Here, it is “L2 Managed Switch”.  
Location:  
Basically, it is the location where this switch is put. User-defined.  
Contact:  
For easily managing and maintaining device, you may write down the  
contact person and phone here for getting help soon. You can configure  
this parameter through the device’s user interface or SNMP.  
Device name:  
The name of the switch. User-defined. Default is GS-2124C.  
System up time:  
The time accumulated since this switch is powered up. Its format is day,  
hour, minute, second.  
Current time:  
Show the system time of the switch. Its format: day of week, month, day,  
hours : minutes : seconds, year. For instance, Wed, Apr. 23, 12:10:10,  
2004.  
BIOS version:  
The version of the BIOS in this switch.  
Firmware version:  
The firmware version in this switch.  
Hardware-Mechanical version:  
The version of Hardware and Mechanical. The figure before the hyphen  
is the version of electronic hardware; the one after the hyphen is the  
version of mechanical.  
Series number:  
The serial number is assigned by the manufacturer.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Host IP address:  
The IP address of the switch.  
Host MAC address:  
It is the Ethernet MAC address of the management agent in this switch.  
Device Port:  
Show all types and numbers of the port in the switch.  
RAM size:  
The size of the DRAM in this switch.  
Flash size:  
The size of the flash memory in this switch.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-1-2. IP Configuration  
IP configuration is one of the most important configurations in the switch.  
Without the proper setting, network manager will not be able to manage or view the  
device. The switch supports both manual IP address setting and automatic IP  
address setting via DHCP server. When IP address is changed, you must reboot the  
switch to have the setting taken effect and use the new IP to browse for web  
management and CLI management.  
Fig. 3-4 IP Address Configuration  
Function name:  
IP Configuration  
Function description:  
Set IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and DNS for the switch.  
Parameter description:  
DHCP Setting:  
DHCP is the abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Here  
DHCP means a switch to turn ON or OFF the function.  
The switch supports DHCP client used to get an IP address automatically  
if you set this function “Enable”. When enabled, the switch will issue the  
request to the DHCP server resided in the network to get an IP address.  
If DHCP server is down or does not exist, the switch will issue the  
request and show IP address is under requesting, until the DHCP server  
is up. Before getting an IP address from DHCP server, the device will not  
continue booting procedures. If set this field “Disable”, you’ll have to  
input IP address manually. For more details about IP address and DHCP,  
please see the Section 2-1-4 “IP Address Assignment” in this manual.  
Default: Disable  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
IP address:  
Users can configure the IP settings and fill in new values if users set the  
DHCP function “Disable”. Then, click <Apply> button to update.  
When DHCP is disabled, Default: 192.168.1.1  
If DHCP is enabled, this field is filled by DHCP server and will not allow  
user manually set it any more.  
Subnet mask:  
Subnet mask is made for the purpose to get more network address  
because any IP device in a network must own its IP address, composed  
of Network address and Host address, otherwise can’t communicate with  
other devices each other. But unfortunately, the network classes A, B,  
and C are all too large to fit for almost all networks, hence, subnet mask  
is introduced to solve this problem. Subnet mask uses some bits from  
host address and makes an IP address looked Network address, Subnet  
mask number and host address. It is shown in the following figure. This  
reduces the total IP number of a network able to support, by the amount  
of 2 power of the bit number of subnet number (2^(bit number of subnet  
number)).  
32 bits  
Network ID  
Network ID  
Host ID  
Host ID  
Subnet number  
Subnet mask is used to set the subnet mask value, which should be the  
same value as that of the other devices resided in the same network it  
attaches.  
For more information, please also see the Section 2-1-4 “IP Address  
Assignment” in this manual.  
Default: 255.255.255.0  
Default gateway:  
Set an IP address for a gateway to handle those packets that do not  
meet the routing rules predefined in the device. If a packet does not meet  
the criteria for other pre-defined path, it must be forwarded to a default  
router on a default path. This means any packet with undefined IP  
address in the routing table will be sent to this device unconditionally.  
Default: 192.168.1.254  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
DNS:  
It is Domain Name Server used to serve the translation between IP  
address and name address.  
The switch supports DNS client function to re-route the mnemonic name  
address to DNS server to get its associated IP address for accessing  
Internet. User can specify a DNS IP address for the switch. With this, the  
switch can translate a mnemonic name address into an IP address.  
There are two ways to specify the IP address of DNS. One is fixed mode,  
which manually specifies its IP address, the other is dynamic mode,  
which is assigned by DHCP server while DHCP is enabled. DNS can  
help you easily remember the mnemonic address name with the  
meaningful words in it. Default is no assignment of DNS address.  
Default: 0.0.0.0  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-1-3. Time Configuration  
The switch provides manual and automatic ways to set the system time via  
NTP. Manual setting is simple and you just input “Year”, “Month”, “Day”, “Hour”,  
“Minute” and “Second” within the valid value range indicated in each item. If you  
input an invalid value, for example, 61 in minute, the switch will clamp the figure to  
59.  
NTP is a well-known protocol used to synchronize the clock of the switch  
system time over a network. NTP, an internet draft standard formalized in RFC 1305,  
has been adopted on the system is version 3 protocol. The switch provides four  
built-in NTP server IP addresses resided in the Internet and an user-defined NTP  
server IP address. The time zone is Greenwich-centered which uses the expression  
form of GMT+/- xx hours.  
Function name:  
Time  
Function description:  
Set the system time by manual input or set it by syncing from Time servers.  
The function also supports daylight saving for different area’s time adjustment.  
Parameter description:  
Current Time:  
Show the current time of the system.  
Manual:  
This is the function to adjust the time manually. Filling the valid figures in  
the fields of Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute and Second respectively and  
press <Apply> button, time is adjusted. The valid figures for the  
parameter Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute and Second are >=2000, 1-12,  
1-31, 0-23, 0-59 and 0-59 respectively. Input the wrong figure and press  
<Apply> button, the device will reject the time adjustment request. There  
is no time zone setting in Manual mode.  
Default: Year = 2000, Month = 1, Day = 1  
Hour = 0,  
Minute = 0, Second = 0  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
NTP:  
NTP is Network Time Protocol and is used to sync the network time  
based Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). If use the NTP mode and select a  
built-in NTP time server or manually specify an user-defined NTP server  
as well as Time Zone, the switch will sync the time in a short after  
pressing <Apply> button. Though it synchronizes the time automatically,  
NTP does not update the time periodically without user’s processing.  
Time Zone is an offset time off GMT. You have to select the time zone  
first and then perform time sync via NTP because the switch will combine  
this time zone offset and updated NTP time to come out the local time,  
otherwise, you will not able to get the correct time. The switch supports  
configurable time zone from –12 to +13 step 1 hour.  
Default Time zone: +8 Hrs.  
Daylight Saving:  
Daylight saving is adopted in some countries. If set, it will adjust the time  
lag or in advance in unit of hours, according to the starting date and the  
ending date. For example, if you set the day light saving to be 1 hour.  
When the time passes over the starting time, the system time will be  
increased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over. And  
when the time passes over the ending time, the system time will be  
decreased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over.  
The switch supports valid configurable day light saving time is –5 ~ +5  
step one hour. The zero for this parameter means it need not have to  
adjust current time, equivalent to in-act daylight saving. You don’t have to  
set the starting/ending date as well. If you set daylight saving to be non-  
zero, you have to set the starting/ending date as well; otherwise, the  
daylight saving function will not be activated.  
Default for Daylight Saving: 0.  
The following parameters are configurable for the function Daylight  
Saving and described in detail.  
Day Light Saving Start :  
This is used to set when to start performing the day light saving time.  
Mth:  
Range is 1 ~ 12.  
Default: 1  
Day:  
Range is 1 ~ 31.  
Default: 1  
Hour:  
Range is 0 ~ 23.  
Default: 0  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Day Light Saving End :  
This is used to set when to stop performing the daylight saving time.  
Mth:  
Range is 1 ~ 12.  
Default: 1  
Day:  
Range is 1 ~ 31.  
Default: 1  
Hour:  
Range is 0 ~ 23.  
Default: 0  
Fig. 3-5  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-1-4. Account Configuration  
In this function, only administrator can create, modify or delete the username  
and password. Administrator can modify other guest identities’ password without  
confirming the password but it is necessary to modify the administrator-equivalent  
identity. Guest-equivalent identity can modify his password only. Please note that  
you must confirm administrator/guest identity in the field of Authorization in advance  
before configuring the username and password. Only one administrator is allowed  
to exist and unable to be deleted. In addition, up to 4 guest accounts can be created.  
The default setting for user account is:  
Username : admin  
Password : admin  
The default setting for guest user account is:  
Username : guest  
Password : guest  
Fig. 3-6  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-1-5. Management Policy  
Through the management security configuration, the manager can do the  
strict setup to control the GS-2124C and limit the user to access this switch.  
The following rules are offered for the manager to manage the GS-2124C:  
Rule 1) : When no lists exists, then it will accept all connections.  
Accept  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------  
Rule 2) : When only “accept lists” exist, then it will deny all connections,  
excluding the connection inside of the accepting range.  
Accept Deny  
Accept  
Deny Accept  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------  
Rule 3) : When only “deny lists” exist, then it will accept all connections,  
excluding the connection inside of the denying range.  
Deny  
Accept Deny  
Accept Deny  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------  
Rule 4) : When both “accept and deny” lists exist, then it will deny all  
connections, excluding the connection inside of the accepting range.  
Accept Deny  
Deny  
Deny Accept  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------  
Rule 5) : When both “accept and deny” lists exist, then it will deny all  
connections, excluding the connection inside of the accepting range and NOT  
inside of the denying range at the same time.  
Accept  
Accept  
Deny  
Deny| Acc | Deny | Acc  
| Deny  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
Management Security Configuration  
Function description:  
GS-2124C offers Management Security Configuration function. With this  
function, the manager can easily control the mode that the user connects to  
GS-2124C. According to the mode, users can be classified into two types:  
Those who are able to connect to GS-2124C (Accept) and those who are  
unable to connect to GS-2124C (Deny). Some restrictions also can be placed  
on the mode that the user connect to GS-2124C, for example, we can decide  
that which VLAN VID is able to be accepted or denied by GS-2124C, the IP  
range of the user could be accepted or denied by GS-2124C, the port that the  
user is allowed or not allowed to connect with GS-2124C, or the way of  
controlling and connecting to GS-2124C via Http, Telnet or SNMP.  
Fig. 3-7  
Parameter description:  
Name:  
A name is composed of any letter (A-Z, a-z) and digit (0-9) with maximal  
8 characters.  
VID:  
GS-2124C supports two kinds of options for managed valid VLAN VID,  
including “Any” and “Custom”. Default is “Any”. When you choose  
“Custom”, you can fill in VID number. The valid VID range is 1~4094.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
IP Range:  
GS-2124C supports two kinds of options for managed valid IP Range,  
including “Any” and “Custom”. Default is “Any”. In case that” Custom”  
had been chosen, you can assigned effective IP range. The valid range  
is 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255.  
Incoming Port:  
GS-2124C supports two kinds of options for managed valid Port Range,  
including “Any” and “Custom”. Default is “Any”. You can select the ports  
that you would like them to be worked and restricted in the management  
security configuration if ”Custom” had been chosen.  
Access Type:  
GS-2124C supports two kinds of options for managed valid Access Type,  
including “Any” and “Custom”. Default is “Any”. “Http”, “Telnet” and  
“SNMP” are three ways for the access and managing the GS-2124C in  
case that” Custom” had been chosen.  
Action:  
GS-2124C supports two kinds of options for managed valid Action Type,  
including “Deny” and “Accept”. Default is “Deny”. When you choose  
“Deny” action, you will be restricted and refused to manage GS-2124C  
due to the “Access Type” you choose. However, while you select  
“Accept” action, you will have the authority to manage GS-2124C.  
Edit/Create:  
A new entry of Management Security Configuration can be created after  
the parameters as mentioned above had been setup and then press  
<Edit/Create> button. Of course, the existed entry also can be modified  
by pressing this button.  
Delete:  
Remove the existed entry of Management Security Configuration from  
the management security table.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-2. Port Configuration  
Four functions, including Port Status, Port Configuration, Simple Counter and  
Detail Counter are contained in this function folder for port monitor and  
management. Each of them will be described in detail orderly in the following  
sections.  
Port Configuration  
Status  
Configuration  
Simple Counter  
Detail Counter  
3-2-1.Port Status  
The function Port Status gathers the information of all ports’ current status  
and reports it by the order of port number, link status, port state, Auto-Negotiation  
status, speed/duplex and flow control. An extra media type information for the  
module ports 23 and 24 is also offered (See Fig. 3-9).  
Fig. 3-8  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
Port Status  
Function Description:  
Report the latest updated status of all ports in this switch. When any one of the  
ports in the switch changes its parameter displayed in the page, it will be  
automatically refreshed the port current status about every 5 seconds.  
Parameter Description:  
Port No:  
Display the port number. The number is 1 – 24. Both port 23 and 24 are  
optional modules.  
Media:  
Show the media type adopted in all ports. The Port 23 and Port 24 are  
optional modules, which support either fiber or UTP media with either  
Gigabit Ethernet (1000Mbps) or 10/100Mbps Fast Ethernet port. They  
may have different media types and speed. Especially, fiber port has  
comprehensive types of connector, distance, fiber mode and so on. The  
switch describes the module ports with the following page.  
Link:  
Show that if the link on the port is active or not. If the link is connected to  
a working-well device, the Link will show the link “Up”; otherwise, it will  
show “Down”. This is determined by the hardware on both devices of the  
connection.  
No default value.  
State:  
Show that the communication function of the port is “Enabled” or  
“Disabled”. When it is enabled, traffic can be transmitted and received via  
this port. When it is disabled, no traffic can be transferred through this  
port. Port State is configured by user.  
Default: Enabled.  
Auto Negotiation:  
Show the exchange mode of Ethernet MAC. There are two modes  
supported in the switch. They are auto-negotiation mode “Enabled” and  
forced mode “Disabled”. When in “Enabled” mode, this function will  
automatically negotiate by hardware itself and exchange each other the  
capability of speed and duplex mode with other site which is linked, and  
comes out the best communication way. When in “Disabled” mode, both  
parties must have the same setting of speed and duplex, otherwise, both  
of them will not be linked. In this case, the link result is “Down”.  
Default: Enabled  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Speed / Duplex Mode:  
Display the speed and duplex of all port. There are three speeds 10Mbps,  
100Mbps and 1000Mbps supported for TP media, and the duplex  
supported is half duplex and full duplex. If the media is 1Gbps fiber, it is  
1000Mbps supported only. The status of speed/duplex mode is  
determined by 1) the negotiation of both local port and link partner in  
“Auto Speed” mode or 2) user setting in “Force” mode. The local port has  
to be preset its capability.  
Default: None, depends on the result of the negotiation.  
Flow Control:  
Show each port’s flow control status.  
There are two types of flow control in Ethernet, Backpressure for half-  
duplex operation and Pause flow control (IEEE802.3x) for full-duplex  
operation. The switch supports both of them.  
Default: Disabled  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Fig. 3-9  
Parameter description of Port 23 and Port24:  
Connector Type:  
Display the connector type, for instance, UTP, SC, ST, LC and so  
on.  
Fiber Type:  
Display the fiber mode, for instance, Multi-Mode, Single-Mode.  
Tx Central Wavelength:  
Display the fiber optical transmitting central wavelength, for  
instance, 850nm, 1310nm, 1550nm and so on.  
Baud Rate:  
Display the maximum baud rate of the fiber module supported, for  
instance, 10M, 100M, 1G, 10G and so on.  
Vendor OUI:  
Display the Manufacturer's OUI code which is assigned by IEEE.  
Vendor Name:  
Display the company name of the module manufacturer.  
Vendor P/N:  
Display the product name of the naming by module manufacturer.  
Vendor Rev (Revision):  
Display the module revision.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Vendor SN (Serial Number):  
Show the serial number assigned by the manufacturer.  
Date Code:  
Show the date this SFP module was made.  
Temperature:  
Show the current temperature of SFP module.  
Vcc:  
Show the working DC voltage of SFP module.  
Mon1(Bias) mA:  
Show the Bias current of SFP module.  
Mon2(TX PWR):  
Show the transmit power of SFP module.  
Mon3(RX PWR):  
Show the receiver power of SFP module.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-2-2. Port Configuration  
Port Configuration is applied to change the setting of each port. In this  
configuration function, you can set/reset the following functions. All of them are  
described in detail below.  
Fig. 3-10  
Function name:  
Port Configuration  
Function description:  
It is used to set each port’s operation mode. The switch supports 3 parameters  
for each port. They are state, mode and flow control.  
Parameter description:  
State:  
Set the communication capability of the port is Enabled or Disabled.  
When enabled, traffic can be transmitted and received via this port.  
When disabled, the port is blocked and no traffic can be transferred  
through this port. Port State is configurable by the user. There are only  
two states “Enable” and “Disable” able to choose. If you set a port’s state  
“Disable”, then that port is prohibited to pass any traffic, even it looks  
Link up.  
Default: Enable.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Mode:  
Set the speed and duplex of the port. In speed, if the media is 1Gbps  
fiber, it is always 1000Mbps and the duplex is full only. If the media is TP,  
the Speed/Duplex is comprised of the combination of speed mode,  
10/100/1000Mbps, and duplex mode, full duplex and half duplex. The  
following table summarized the function the media supports.  
Media type  
NWay  
Speed  
Duplex  
1000M TP  
1000M Fiber ON/OFF  
ON/OFF  
10/100/1000M  
1000M  
Full for all, Half for 10/100  
Full  
In Auto-negotiation mode, no default value. In Forced mode, default  
value depends on your setting.  
Flow Control:  
There are two modes to choose in flow control, including Enable and  
Disable. If flow control is set Enable, both parties can send PAUSE frame  
to the transmitting device(s) if the receiving port is too busy to handle.  
When it is set Disable, there will be no flow control in the port. It drops  
the packet if too much to handle.  
Default: Enable.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-2-3. Simple Counter  
The function of Simple Counter collects any information and provides the  
counting about the traffic of the port, no matter the packet is good or bad.  
In the Fig. 3-11, the window can show all ports’ counter information at the  
same time. Each data field has 12-digit long. If the counting is overflow, the counter  
will be reset and restart counting. The data is updated every time interval defined by  
the user. The valid range is 3 to 10 seconds. The Refresh Interval is used to set the  
update frequency. Default update time is 3 seconds.  
Fig. 3-11  
Function name:  
Simple Counter  
Function description:  
Display the summary counting of each port’s traffic, including Tx Byte, Rx Byte,  
Tx Packet, Rx Packet, Tx Collision and Rx Error Packet.  
Parameters description:  
Tx Byte:  
Total transmitted bytes.  
Rx Byte:  
Total received bytes.  
Tx Packet:  
The counting number of the packet transmitted.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Rx Packet:  
The counting number of the packet received.  
Tx Collision:  
Number of collisions transmitting frames experienced.  
Rx Error Packet:  
Number of bad packets received.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-2-4. Detail Counter  
The function of Detail Counter collects any information and provides the  
counting about the traffic of the port, no matter the packet is good or bad.  
In the Fig. 3-12, the window can show only one port counter information at  
the same time. To see another port’s counter, you have to pull down the list of  
Select, then you will see the figures displayed about the port you had chosen.  
Each data field has 12-digit long. If the counting is overflow, the counter will  
be reset and restart counting. The data is updated every time interval defined by the  
user. The valid range is 3 to 10 seconds. The Refresh Interval is used to set the  
update frequency. Default update time is 3 seconds.  
Fig. 3-12  
Function name:  
Detail Counter  
Function description:  
Display the detailed counting number of each port’s traffic. In the Fig. 3-12, the  
window can show all counter information of each port at one time.  
Parameter description:  
Rx Packets:  
The counting number of the packet received.  
RX Octets:  
Total received bytes.  
Rx High Priority Packets:  
Number of Rx packets classified as high priority.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Rx Low Priority Packets:  
Number of Rx packets classified as low priority.  
Rx Broadcast:  
Show the counting number of the received broadcast packet.  
Rx Multicast:  
Show the counting number of the received multicast packet.  
Tx Packets:  
The counting number of the packet transmitted.  
TX Octets:  
Total transmitted bytes.  
Tx High Priority Packets:  
Number of Tx packets classified as high priority.  
Tx Low Priority Packets:  
Number of Tx packets classified as low priority.  
Tx Broadcast:  
Show the counting number of the transmitted broadcast packet.  
Tx Multicast:  
Show the counting number of the transmitted multicast packet.  
Rx 64 Bytes:  
Number of 64-byte frames in good and bad packets received.  
Rx 65-127 Bytes:  
Number of 65 ~ 126-byte frames in good and bad packets received.  
Rx 128-255 Bytes:  
Number of 127 ~ 255-byte frames in good and bad packets received.  
Rx 256-511 Bytes:  
Number of 256 ~ 511-byte frames in good and bad packets received.  
Rx 512-1023 Bytes:  
Number of 512 ~ 1023-byte frames in good and bad packets received.  
Rx 1024-Bytes:  
Number of 1024-max_length-byte frames in good and bad packets  
received.  
Tx 64 Bytes:  
Number of 64-byte frames in good and bad packets transmitted.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Tx 65-127 Bytes:  
Number of 65 ~ 126-byte frames in good and bad packets transmitted.  
Tx 128-255 Bytes:  
Number of 127 ~ 255-byte frames in good and bad packets transmitted.  
Tx 256-511 Bytes:  
Number of 256 ~ 511-byte frames in good and bad packets transmitted.  
Tx 512-1023 Bytes:  
Number of 512 ~ 1023-byte frames in good and bad packets transmitted.  
Tx 1024-Bytes:  
Number of 1024-max_length-byte frames in good and bad packets  
transmitted.  
Rx CRC/Alignment:  
Number of Alignment errors and CRC error packets received.  
Rx Undersize:  
Number of short frames (<64 Bytes) with valid CRC.  
Rx Oversize:  
Number of long frames(according to max_length register) with valid CRC.  
Rx Fragments:  
Number of short frames (< 64 bytes) with invalid CRC.  
Rx Jabber:  
Number of long frames(according tomax_length register) with invalid  
CRC.  
Rx Drops:  
Frames dropped due to the lack of receiving buffer.  
Rx Errors:  
Number of the error packet received.  
Tx Collisions:  
Number of collisions transmitting frames experienced.  
Tx Drops:  
Number of frames dropped due to excessive collision, late collision, or  
frame aging.  
Tx FIFO Drops:  
Number of frames dropped due to the lack of transmitting buffer.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-3. Mirror  
Function name:  
Mirror Configuration  
Function description:  
Mirror Configuration is to monitor the traffic of the network. For example, we  
assume that Port A and Port B are Monitoring Port and Monitored Port  
respectively, thus, the traffic received by Port B will be copied to Port A for  
monitoring.  
Note:  
When configuring the mirror function, you should avoid setting a port to be a  
sniffer port and aggregated port at the same time. It will cause something  
wrong.  
Parameter description:  
Mode:  
Used for the activation or de-activation of Port Mirror function. Default is  
disable.  
Monitoring Port:  
Set up the port for monitoring. Valid port is Port 1~24 and default is  
Port 1.  
Monitored Port:  
Set up the port for being monitored. Just tick the check box () beside  
the port x and valid port is Port 1~24.  
Fig. 3-13  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-4. Bandwidth Management  
Function name:  
Bandwidth Management  
Function description:  
Bandwidth Management function is used to set up the limit of Ingress and  
Egress bandwidth for each port.  
Note:  
Each port of the switch owns 16KB packet buffer. The packet buffer size will  
be reduced when the bandwidth rate limitation is enabled, which may cause  
that jumbo frame cannot be forwarded.  
Please avoid enabling jumbo frame and bandwidth rating functions at the  
same time.  
Fig. 3-14  
Parameter description:  
Port Number:  
Choose the port that you would like this function to work on it. Valid  
range of the port is 1~24.  
All Traffic for Ingress Rate Limiting(Policing):  
Set up the limit of Ingress bandwidth for the port you choose. Incoming  
traffic will be discarded if the rate exceeds the value you set up in Data  
Rate field. Pause frames are also generated if flow control is enabled.  
The format of the packet limits to unicast, broadcast and multicast. Valid  
range is 0~1000.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Broadcast & Multicasat for Ingress Rate Limiting (Policing):  
Set up the limit of Ingress bandwidth for the port you choose. Incoming  
traffic will be discarded if the rate exceeds the value you set up in Data  
Rate field. The format of the packet limits to broadcast and multicast.  
Valid range is 0~1000.  
All Traffic for Egress Rate Limiting(Shaping):  
Set up the limit of Egress bandwidth for the port you choose. Packet  
transmission will be delayed if the rate exceeds the value you set up in  
Data Rate field. Traffic may be lost if egress buffers run full. The format  
of the packet limits to unicast, broadcast and multicast. Valid range is  
0~1000.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-5. QoS(Quality of Service) Configuration  
The switch offers powerful 5 kinds of QoS functions. There are Per Port  
Priority that you can assign each port to different precedence, VLAN Tag priority  
that can make precedence of 8 priorities, IP TOS Classification, IP TCP/UDP Port  
Classification and IP DiffServe Classification.  
In Quality of Service (QoS) Configuration, there is one option named” Default  
Class”. As you had selected one of the five QoS functions, then some packets that  
did not belong to this QoS setting would be viewed as Default Class. For instance, if  
you set QoS function as VLAN Tag Priority mode, and then choose Default Class as  
High, finally, the priority of the packets with no tag will be considered as High priority  
precedence. The initial value of the Default Class is High.  
Fig. 3-15  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
Per Port Priority  
Function description:  
We can assign QoS Priority, including High and Low for each port. For  
example, if we transmit IP packets from Port 2 and Port 3 at the speed of  
1Gbps to Port 1, and set the Class of Port 2 as High and Port 3 as Low, then  
the packets of Port 3 will be dropped when the congestion happens because  
Port 2 owns higher precedence of transmitting packets.  
Parameter description:  
Port No:  
User can choose the port (1~24) respectively with Priority Class on Per  
Port Priority function.  
Class:  
User can set up High Priority or Low Priority for each port respectively.  
Fig. 3-16  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
VLAN Tag Priority  
Function description:  
In vlan tag, there are 3 bits belonging to priority. According to these 3 bits, we  
could arrange 8 traffics –0 0 0, 0 0 1, 0 1 0, 0 1 0, 1 0 0, 1 0 1, 1 1 0, 1 1 1. We  
can set High priority or Low priority for each traffic class. For instance, if we let  
VLAN-tagged priority 0 0 0 be high priority and VLAN-tagged priority 0 0 1 be  
Low Priority, and then make port 1, 2, 3 be in the vlan 2. We sent in the  
packets that have vlan-tagged Field appears 0 0 0 and VID equals 2 from the  
port 2 and the packets that have vlan-tagged Field appears 0 0 1 and VID  
equals 2 from the port 3. We let the two kinds of packets be transmitted for  
port 1 until the port results in congestion. The result is that the packets will be  
dropped partially from the port 3 because the packets that belong to Low  
Priority. For the use of VLAN Tag Priority function, please press <Configure>  
button at the right section for setting in advance.  
Fig. 3-17  
Parameter description:  
Quality of Service (QoS) Vlan Tag Configuration:  
Used for setting up the QoS belongs to Vlan operation.  
Port:  
User can set up the port (1~24) respectively to let Vlan Tag QoS function  
work on them. If you would like to set up all ports at a time, user is also  
allowed to choose “All” in the selection list to simplify the procedure of  
configuration.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Bit 0, Bit 1, Bit 2:  
According to the arrangement of VLAN-tagged priority, it can form 8  
kinds of traffics, including 0 0 0, 0 0 1, 0 1 0, 0 1 0, 1 0 0, 1 0 1, 1 1 0  
and 1 1 1.  
Class:  
8 kinds of traffic as mentioned above, user can set up High Priority or  
Low Priority for each port respectively.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
IP ToS Classification  
Function description:  
Another QoS function is the application of Layer 3 on network framework. We  
focus on TOS field of IP header. There are three bits in TOS field. We means  
bit 2~4 of TOS field that we will use. According to these 3 bits, we could  
arrange 8 traffics –0 0 0, 0 0 1, 0 1 0, 0 1 0, 1 0 0, 1 0 1, 1 1 0, 1 1 1. As long  
as we change bit 5~7 of TOS field of IP header, we will create the 8 traffic  
packets we meant before. Moreover, we can set High priority or Low priority  
for each traffic class. For instance, if we let TOS 0 0 0 be high priority and TOS  
0 0 1 be Low Priority, we sent in the packets that have bit 5~7 of TOS Field  
appears 0 0 0 from the port 2 and the packets that have bit 5~7 of TOS Field  
appears 0 0 1 from the port 3. We let the two kinds of packets be transmitted  
for port 1 until the port results in congestion. The result is that the packets will  
be dropped partially from the port 3 because the packets that belong to Low  
Priority. For the use of TOS Priority function, please press <Configure>  
button at the right section for setting in advance.  
Fig. 3-18  
Parameter description:  
Quality of Service (QoS) ToS Configuration:  
Used for setting up the QoS in Layer 3.  
Port:  
User can set up the port (1~24) respectively to let TOS QoS function  
work on them. If you would like to set up all ports at a time, user is also  
allowed to choose “All” in the selection list to simplify the procedure of  
configuration.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Bit 0, Bit 1, Bit 2:  
According to the arrangement of Bit 5 ~ Bit 7 in TOS Field of IP Header,  
it can form 8 kinds of traffics, including 0 0 0, 0 0 1, 0 1 0, 0 1 0, 1 0 0,  
1 0 1, 1 1 0 and 1 1 1.  
Class:  
8 kinds of traffic as mentioned above, user can set up High Priority or  
Low Priority for each port respectively.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
IP TCP/UDP Port Classification  
Function description:  
In L4 QoS Configuration, you can enter one of these special network  
transmission events, for example we use” Down prioritize web browsing,  
e-mail, FTP and news “L4 QoS Configuration and click apply, and then click  
Custom L4. We can find Special TCP/UDP port 80, 280, 443, 25, 110, 20, 21,  
69, 119, 2009 have already existed and defined for your using but it is fine that  
you modify this pre-defined TCP/UDP port with other port number you prefer.  
In ” Down prioritize web browsing, e-mail, FTP and news “ L4 QoS  
Configuration with default setting, special defined TCP/UDP port possesses  
lower QoS traffic than Default class ( all other TCP/UDP ports such as port  
81,82,83,84,85, etc.). Giving an example, when we transmit TCP packets with  
port number 80 at each of port 2 and port number 81 at port 3 to port 1 until  
the congestion happens. The packets from port 3 will be dropped by port 1  
because the TCP packets have port number 80 is high priority and will have  
higher precedence to be sent out from port 1.  
Parameter description:  
Disable IP TCP/UDP Port Classification:  
Belong to the QoS in L4. Just tick the option button and press <Apply>  
button to have this function taken affect. Then, enter Custom L4 to  
disable IP TCP/UDP port Classification for QoS.  
Down prioritize web browsing, e-mail, FTP and news:  
Belong to the QoS in L4. Just tick the option button and press <Apply>  
button to have this function taken affect. Then, enter Custom L4 to set up  
Special TCP/UDP port for QoS.  
Prioritize IP Telephony (VoIP):  
Belong to the QoS in L4. Just tick the option button and press <Apply>  
button to have this function taken affect. Then, enter Custom L4 to set  
up Special TCP/UDP port for QoS.  
Prioritize iSCSI:  
Belong to the QoS in L4. Just tick the option button and press <Apply>  
button to have this function taken affect. Then, enter Custom L4 to set  
up Special TCP/UDP port for QoS.  
Prioritize web browsing, e-mail, FTP transfers and news:  
Belong to the QoS in L4. Just tick the option button and press <Apply>  
button to have this function taken affect. Then, enter Custom L4 to set  
up Special TCP/UDP port for QoS.  
Prioritize Streaming Audio/Video:  
Belong to the QoS in L4. Just tick the option button and press <Apply>  
button to have this function taken affect. Then, enter Custom L4 to set  
up Special TCP/UDP port for QoS.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Prioritize Databases (Oracle, IBM DB2, SQL, Microsoft):  
Belong to the QoS in L4. Just tick the option button and press <Apply>  
button to have this function taken affect. Then, enter Custom L4 to set  
up Special TCP/UDP port for QoS.  
Advanced Mode:  
Display the TCP/UDP port number in L4 QoS. In “Disable IP TCP/UDP  
Port Classification” mode, user can randomly choose TCP/UDP port  
number that L4 QoS will affect. As to other special L4 QoS events,  
Special TCP/UDP port number will be took action. Of course, user could  
be allowed to add or modify the port number at random. For instance, if  
we choose “Down prioritize web browsing, e-mail, FTP and news” as the  
QoS of L4 and enter the “Advanced Mode”, then we can see that some  
special port number 80, 280, 443, 25, 110, 20, 21, 69, 119, 2009 have  
been configured already. User also has the right to modify these port  
numbers. The display is shown as Fig 3-19.  
Special TCP/UDP class:  
There are two modes for selection, including Low and High.  
Default class (all other TCP/UDP ports):  
There are two modes for selection, including Low and High.  
Port:  
User can set up the port (1~24) respectively to let Special  
TDP/UDP class function work on them. If you would like to set up  
all ports at a time, user is allowed to choose “All” selection to  
simplify the procedure of configuration.  
Special UDP/TCP Port Selection:  
The following are port numbers defined by six specific networks in  
L4:  
Down prioritize web browsing, e-mail, FTP and news:  
port number 80,280,443,25,110,20,21,69,119,2009  
Prioritize IP Telephony (VoIP):1718,1719,1720  
Prioritize iSCSI:3225,3260,3420  
Prioritize web browsing, e-mail, FTP transfers and news:  
80,280,443,25,110,20,21,69,119,2009  
Prioritize Streaming Audio/Video: 2979,1755,7070,7071,554,8000  
Prioritize Databases (Oracle, IBM DB2, SQL,  
Microsoft):66,1571,1575,523,118,156,3306,1232,1433,1434  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Fig. 3-19 Advanced Mode  
Fig. 3-20 Simple Mode  
Simple Mode:  
Press <Simple> button is to return to the screen that all L4 port number  
will disappear (See Fig 3-20).  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
IP Diffserv Classification  
Function description:  
In the late 1990s, the IETF redefined the meaning of the 8-bit SERVICE TYPE  
field to accommodate a set of differentiated services (DS). Under the  
differentiated services interpretation, the first six bits comprise a codepoint,  
which is sometimes abbreviated DSCP, and the last two bits are left unused.  
IP Diffserve Classification function, it can form total 64 (0~63) kinds of Traffic  
Class based on the arrangement of 6-bit field in DSCP of the IP packet. In the  
switch, user is allowed to set up these 64 kinds of Class that belong to High or  
Low Priority.  
Parameter description:  
IP Differentiated Services (DiffServ) Configuration:  
Used for setting up the IP Differentiated Services Configuration QoS.  
Diffserv:  
Display 64 (0~63) DiffServ Priority items.  
Class:  
64 kinds of traffic as we mentioned above, user can set up High Priority  
or Low Priority for each port respectively.  
Fig. 3-21  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-6. SNMP Configuration  
Any Network Management System (NMS) running the Simple Network  
Management Protocol (SNMP) can manage the Managed devices equipped with  
SNMP agent, provided that the Management Information Base (MIB) is installed  
correctly on the managed devices. The SNMP is a protocol that is used to govern  
the transfer of information between SNMP manager and agent and traverses the  
Object Identity (OID) of the management Information Base (MIB), described in the  
form of SMI syntax. SNMP agent is running on the switch to response the request  
issued by SNMP manager.  
Basically, it is passive except issuing the trap information. The switch  
supports a switch to turn on or off the SNMP agent. If you set the field SNMP  
“Enable”, SNMP agent will be started up. All supported MIB OIDs, including RMON  
MIB, can be accessed via SNMP manager. If the field SNMP is set “Disable”, SNMP  
agent will be de-activated, the related Community Name, Trap Host IP Address,  
Trap and all MIB counters will be ignored.  
Function name:  
SNMP Configuration  
Function description:  
This function is used to configure SNMP settings, community name, trap host  
and public traps as well as the throttle of SNMP. A SNMP manager must pass the  
authentication by identifying both community names, then it can access the MIB  
information of the target device. So, both parties must have the same community  
name. Once completing the setting, click <Apply> button, the setting takes effect.  
Parameters description:  
SNMP:  
The term SNMP here is used for the activation or de-activation of SNMP.  
Default is Enable.  
Get/Set/Trap Community:  
Community name is used as password for authenticating if the  
requesting network management unit belongs to the same community  
group. If they both don’t have the same community name, they don’t  
belong to the same group. Hence, the requesting network management  
unit can not access the device with different community name via SNMP  
protocol; If they both have the same community name, they can talk each  
other.  
Community name is user-definable with a maximum length of 15  
characters and is case sensitive. There is not allowed to put any blank in  
the community name string. Any printable character is allowable.  
The community name for each function works independently. Each  
function has its own community name. Say, the community name for  
GET only works for GET function and can’t be applied to other function  
such as SET and Trap.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Default SNMP function : Enable  
Default community name for GET: public  
Default community name for SET: private  
Default community name for Trap: public  
Default Set function : Enable  
Default trap host IP address: 0.0.0.0  
Default port number :162  
Trap:  
In the switch, there are four trap hosts supported. Each of them has its  
own community name and IP address; is user-definable. To set up a trap  
host means to create a trap manager by assigning an IP address to host  
the trap message. In other words, the trap host is a network  
management unit with SNMP manager receiving the trap message from  
the managed switch with SNMP agent issuing the trap message. 6 trap  
hosts can prevent the important trap message from losing.  
For each public trap, the switch supports the trap event Cold Start, Warm  
Start, Link Down, Link Up and Authentication Failure Trap. They can be  
enabled or disabled individually. When enabled, the corresponded trap  
will actively send a trap message to the trap host when a trap happens. If  
all public traps are disabled, no public trap message will be sent. As to  
the Enterprise (no. 6) trap is classified as private trap, which are listed in  
the Trap Alarm Configuration function folder.  
Default for all public traps: Enable.  
Fig. 3-22 Community and trap host setting  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-7. IGMP Snooping  
The function, IGMP Snooping, is used to establish the multicast groups to  
forward the multicast packet to the member ports, and, in nature, avoids wasting the  
bandwidth while IP multicast packets are running over the network. This is because  
a switch that does not support IGMP or IGMP Snooping can not tell the multicast  
packet from the broadcast packet, so it can only treat them all as the broadcast  
packet. Without IGMP Snooping, the multicast packet forwarding function is plain  
and nothing is different from broadcast packet.  
A switch supported IGMP Snooping with the functions of query, report and  
leave, a type of packet exchanged between IP Multicast Router/Switch and IP  
Multicast Host, can update the information of the Multicast table when a member  
(port) joins or leaves an IP Multicast Destination Address. With this function, once a  
switch receives an IP multicast packet, it will forward the packet to the members  
who joined in a specified IP multicast group before.  
Fig. 3-23  
Function name:  
IGMP Snooping  
Function description:  
IGMP is used to snoop the status of IP multicast groups and display its  
associated information in both tagged VLAN and non-tagged VLAN networks.  
Enabling IGMP with either passive or active mode, you can monitor the IGMP  
snooping information, which contains the multicast member list with the  
multicast groups, VID and member port.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Parameter description:  
IGMP snooping mode selection:  
The switch supports three kinds of IGMP Snooping status, including  
“Passive”, “Active” and “Disable”.  
Disable:  
Set “Disable” mode to disable IGMP Snooping function.  
Default: Disable  
Active:  
In Active mode, IGMP snooping switch will periodically issue the  
Membership Query message to all hosts attached to it and  
gather the Membership report message to update the database  
of the Multicast table. By the way, this also reduces the  
unnecessary multicast traffic.  
Passive:  
In Passive Snooping mode, the IGMP snooping will not  
periodically poll the hosts in the groups. The switch will send a  
Membership Query message to all hosts only when it has  
received a Membership Query message from a router.  
IP Address:  
Show all multicast groups IP addresses that are registered on this device.  
VLAN ID:  
Show VLAN ID for each multicast group.  
Member Port:  
Show member ports that join each multicast group. Member port may be  
only or more than one.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-8. Max. Packet Length  
Function name:  
Max. Packet Length  
Function description:  
The switch is capable of dealing with 9k Jumbo Frames, which suits the  
transmission for a large amount of data in the network environment.  
Parameter description:  
Jumbo Frame(bytes):  
Set up the maximum length of the packet that each port of the switch can  
accept. Maximum length can be up to 1532 bytes or 9216 bytes. The  
default is 1532 bytes.  
Fig. 3-24  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-9. DHCP Boot  
The DHCP Boot function is used to spread the request broadcast packet into  
a bigger time frame to prevent the traffic congestion due to broadcast packets from  
many network devices which may seek its NMS, boot server, DHCP server and  
many connections predefined when the whole building or block lose the power and  
then reboot and recover. At this moment, a bunch of switch or other network device  
on the LAN will try its best to find the server to get the services or try to set up the  
predefined links, they will issue many broadcast packets in the network.  
The switch supports a random delay time for DHCP and boot delay for each  
device. This suppresses the broadcast storm while all devices are at booting stage  
in the same time. The maximum user-defined delay time is 30 sec. If DHCP  
Broadcasting Suppression function is enabled, the delay time is set randomly,  
ranging from 0 to 30 seconds, because the exactly delay time is computed by the  
switch itself. The default is “Disable”.  
Fig. 3-25  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-10. VLAN  
The switch supports Tag-based VLAN (802.1q) and Port-based VLAN.  
Support 256 active VLANs and VLAN ID 1~4094. VLAN configuration is used to  
partition your LAN into small ones as your demand. Properly configuring it, you can  
gain not only improving security and increasing performance but greatly reducing  
VLAN management.  
3-10-1. VLAN Mode  
Function name:  
VLAN Mode Setting  
Function description:  
The VLAN Mode Selection function includes five modes: Port-based, Tag-  
based, Metro Mode, Double-tag and Disable, you can choose one of them by  
pulling down list and pressing the <Downward> arrow key. Then, click  
<Apply> button, the settings will take effect immediately.  
Parameter description:  
VLAN Mode:  
Disable:  
Stop VLAN function on the switch. In this mode, no VLAN is applied  
to the switch. This is the default setting.  
Port-based:  
Port-based VLAN is defined by port. Any packet coming in or  
outgoing from any one port of a port-based VLAN will be accepted.  
No filtering criterion applies in port-based VLAN. The only criterion  
is the physical port you connect to. For example, for a port-based  
VLAN named PVLAN-1 contains port members Port 1&2&3&4. If  
you are on the port 1, you can communicate with port 2&3&4. If you  
are on the port 5, then you cannot talk to them. Each port-based  
VLAN you built up must be assigned a group name. This switch can  
support up to maximal 24 port-based VLAN groups.  
Tag-based:  
Tag-based VLAN identifies its member by VID. This is quite  
different from port-based VLAN. If there are any more rules in  
ingress filtering list or egress filtering list, the packet will be  
screened with more filtering criteria to determine if it can be  
forwarded. The switch supports supplement of 802.1q. For more  
details, please see the section VLAN in Chapter 3.  
Each tag-based VLAN you built up must be assigned VLAN name  
and VLAN ID. Valid VLAN ID is 1-4094. User can create total up to  
64 Tag VLAN groups.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Metro Mode:  
The Metro Mode is a quick configuration VLAN environment  
method on Port-based VLAN. It will create 22 or 23 Port-based  
VLAN groups.  
Double-tag:  
Double-tag mode belongs to the tag-based mode, however, it would  
treat all frames as the untagged ones, which means that tag with  
PVID will be added into all packets. Then, these packets will be  
forwarded as Tag-based VLAN. So, the incoming packets with tag  
will become the double-tag ones.  
Fig. 3-26  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Up-link Port:  
This function is enabled only when metro mode is chosen in VLAN mode.  
23:  
Except Port 23, each port of the switch cannot transmit packets with  
each other. Each port groups a VLAN with Port 23, thus, total 23  
groups consisting of 2 members are formed.  
24:  
Except Port 24, each port of the switch cannot transmit packets with  
each other. Each port groups a VLAN with Port 24, thus, total 23  
groups consisting of 2 members are formed.  
23&24:  
Except Port 23 and Port 24, each port of the switch cannot transmit  
packets with each other. Each port groups a VLAN with Port 23  
and Port 24, thus, total 22 groups consisting of 3 members are  
formed.  
Fig. 3-27  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-10-2. Tag-based Group  
Function name:  
Tag-based Group Configuration  
Function description:  
It shows the information of existed Tag-based VLAN Groups, You can also  
easily create, edit and delete a Tag-based VLAN group by pressing <Add>,  
<Edit> and <Delete> function buttons. User can add a new VLAN group by  
inputting a new VLAN name and VLAN ID.  
Parameter description:  
VLAN Name:  
The name defined by administrator is associated with a VLAN group.  
Valid letters are A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “ - “ and “_” characters. The maximal  
length is 15 characters.  
VID:  
VLAN identifier. Each tag-based VLAN group has a unique VID. It  
appears only in tag-based and Double-tag mode.  
SYM-VLAN:  
While the SYM-VLAN function of the group is enabled, all packets with  
this group VID will be dropped in case they are transmitted from the ports  
that do not belong to this group.  
Member:  
This is used to enable or disable if a port is a member of the new added  
VLAN, “Enable” means it is a member of the VLAN. Just tick the check  
box () beside the port x to enable it.  
Fig. 3-28  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Add Group:  
Create a new Tag-based VLAN. Input the VLAN name as well as VID,  
configure the SYM-VLAN function and choose the member by ticking the  
check box beside the port No., then, press the <Apply> button to have  
the setting taken effect.  
Fig. 3-29  
Delete Group:  
Just press the <Delete> button to remove the selected group entry from  
the Tag-based group table.  
Fig. 3-30  
Edit a group:  
Just select a group entry and press the <Edit> button, then you can  
modify a group’s description, SYM-VLAN and member set.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-10-3. Port-based Group  
Function name:  
Port-based Group Configuration  
Function description:  
It shows the information of the existed Port-based VLAN Groups. You can  
easily create, edit and delete a Port-based VLAN group by pressing <Add>,  
<Edit> and <Delete> function buttons. User can add a new VLAN group by  
inputting a new VLAN name.  
Parameter description:  
VLAN Name:  
The name defined by administrator is associated with a VLAN group.  
Valid letters are A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “ - “ and “_” characters. The maximal  
length is 15 characters.  
Member:  
This is used to enable or disable if a port is a member of the new added  
VLAN, “Enable” means it is a member of the VLAN. Just tick the check  
box () beside the port x to enable it.  
Fig. 3-31  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Add Group:  
Create a new Port-based VLAN. Input the VLAN name and choose the  
member by ticking the check box beside the port No., then, press the  
<Apply> button to have the setting taken effect.  
Fig. 3-32  
Delete Group:  
Just press the <Delete> button to remove the selected group entry from  
the Port-based group table.  
Fig. 3-33  
Edit a group:  
Just select a group entry and press the <Edit> button, then you can  
modify a group‘s description and member set.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-10-4. Tag Rule  
Function name:  
Tag Rule  
Function description:  
In VLAN Tag Rule Setting, user can input VID number to each port. The range  
of VID number is from 1 to 4094. User also can choose ingress filtering rules  
to each port. There are two ingress filtering rules which can be applied to the  
switch. The Ingress Filtering Rule 1 is “forward only packets with VID matching  
this port’s configured VID”. The Ingress Filtering Rule 2 is “drop untagged  
frame”. You can also select the Role of each port as Access, Trunk, or Hybrid.  
Parameter description:  
Port 1-24:  
Port number.  
PVID:  
This PVID range will be 1-4094. Before you set a number x as PVID, you  
have to create a Tag-based VLAN with VID x. For example, if port x  
receives an untagged packet, the switch will apply the PVID (assume as  
VID y) of port x to tag this packet, the packet then will be forwarded as  
the tagged packet with VID y.  
Rule 1:  
Forward only packets with VID matching this port’s configured VID. You  
can apply Rule 1 as a way to a given port to filter unwanted traffic. In  
Rule 1, a given port checks if the given port is a member of the VLAN on  
which the received packet belongs to, to determine forward it or not. For  
example, if port 1 receives a tagged packet with VID=100 (VLAN  
name=VLAN100), and if Rule 1 is enabled, the switch will check if port 1  
is a member of VLAN100. If yes, the received packet is forwarded;  
otherwise, the received packet is dropped.  
Rule 2:  
Drop untagged frame. You can configure a given port to accept all frames  
(Tagged and Untagged) or just receive tagged frame. If the former is the  
case, then the packets with tagged or untagged will be processed. If the  
later is the case, only the packets carrying VLAN tag will be processed,  
the rest packets will be discarded.  
Note: If Rule 1 is enabled and port 1, for example, receives an untagged packet,  
the switch will apply the PVID of port 1 to tag this packet, the packet then will  
be forwarded. But if the PVID of port 1 is not 100, the packet will be dropped.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Role:  
This is an egress rule of the port. Here you can choose Access, Trunk or  
Hybrid. Trunk means the outgoing packets must carry VLAN tag header.  
Access means the outgoing packets carry no VLAN tag header. If  
packets have double VLAN tags, one will be dropped and the other will  
still be left. As to Hybrid, it is similar to Trunk, and both of them will tag-  
out. When the port is set to Hybrid, its packets will be untagged out if the  
VID of the outgoing packets with tag is the same as the one in the field of  
Untag VID of this port.  
Untag VID:  
Valid range is 0~4094. It works only when Role is set to Hybrid.  
Fig. 3-34  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-11. MAC Table  
MAC Table Configuration gathers many functions, including MAC Table  
Information, MAC Table Maintenance, Static Forward, Static Filter and MAC Alias,  
which cannot be categorized to some function type. They are described below.  
Function name:  
MAC Table Information  
Function Description:  
Display the static or dynamic learning MAC entry and the state for the selected  
port.  
Parameter description:  
Port:  
Select the port you would like to inquire.  
Search:  
Set up the MAC entry you would like to inquire.  
The default is ??-??-??-??-??-??  
MAC:  
Display the MAC address of one entry you selected from the searched  
MAC entries table.  
Alias:  
Set up the Alias for the selected MAC entry.  
Set Alias:  
Save the Alias of MAC entry you set up.  
Search:  
Find the entry that meets your setup.  
Previous Page:  
Move to the previous page.  
Next Page:  
Move to the next page.  
Alias:  
The Alias of the searched entry.  
MAC Address:  
The MAC address of the searched entry.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Port:  
VID:  
The port that exists in the searched MAC Entry.  
VLAN Group that MAC Entry exists.  
State:  
Display the method that this MAC Entry is built. It may show “Dynamic  
MAC” or “Static MAC”.  
Fig. 3-35  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function Name:  
MAC Table Maintenance  
Function Description:  
This function can allow the user to set up the processing mechanism of MAC  
Table. An idle MAC address exceeding MAC Address Age-out Time will be  
removed from the MAC Table. The range of Age-out Time is 10-65535  
seconds, and the setup of this time will have no effect on static MAC  
addresses.  
Parameter description:  
Aging Time:  
Delete a MAC address idling for a period of time from the MAC Table,  
which will not affect static MAC address. Range of MAC Address Aging  
Time is 10-65535 seconds. The default Aging Time is 300 seconds.  
Flush:  
Remove all entries that do not belong to the static Mac Entry from the  
MAC Table.  
Fig. 3-36  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function Name:  
Static Forward  
Function Description:  
Static Forward is a function that allows the user in the static forward table to  
access a specified port of the switch. Static Forward table associated with a  
specified port of a switch is set up by manually inputting MAC address and its  
alias name.  
When a MAC address is assigned to a specific port, all of the switch’s traffics  
sent to this MAC address will be forwarded to this port.  
For adding a MAC address entry in the allowed table, you just need to fill in  
four parameters: MAC address, associated port, VID and Alias. Just select the  
existed MAC address entry you want and click <Delete> button, you also can  
remove it.  
Parameter description:  
MAC:  
It is a six-byte long Ethernet hardware address and usually expressed by  
hex and separated by hyphens. For example,  
00 – 40 - C7 - D6 – 00 - 01  
Port No:  
Port number of the switch. It is 1 ~24.  
VID:  
VLAN identifier. This will be filled only when tagged VLAN is applied.  
Valid range is 1 ~ 4094.  
Alias:  
MAC alias name you assign.  
Fig. 3-37  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
Static Filter  
Function Description:  
Static Filter is a function that denies the packet forwarding if the packet’s MAC  
Address is listed in the filtering Static Filter table. User can very easily  
maintain the table by filling in MAC Address, VID (VLAN ID) and Alias fields  
individually. User also can delete the existed entry by clicking <Delete> button.  
Parameter description:  
MAC:  
It is a six-byte long Ethernet hardware address and usually expressed by  
hex and separated by hyphens. For example,  
00 – 40 - C7 - D6 – 00 - 02  
VID :  
VLAN identifier. This will be filled only when tagged VLAN is applied.  
Valid range is 1 ~ 4094.  
Alias :  
MAC alias name you assign.  
Fig. 3-38  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
MAC Alias  
Function description:  
MAC Alias function is used to let you assign MAC address a plain English  
name. This will help you tell which MAC address belongs to which user in the  
illegal access report. At the initial time, it shows all pairs of the existed alias  
name and MAC address.  
There are three MAC alias functions in this function folder, including MAC Alias  
Add, MAC Alias Edit and MAC Alias Delete. You can click <Create/Edit>  
button to add/modify a new or an existed alias name for a specified MAC  
address, or mark an existed entry to delete it. Alias name must be composed  
of A-Z, a-z and 0-9 only and has a maximal length of 15 characters.  
Function name:  
MAC Alias Create/Edit or Delete  
Function description:  
In the MAC Alias function, MAC Alias Add/Edit function is used to let you add  
or modify an association between MAC address and a plain English name.  
User can click <Create/Edit> button to add a new record with name.  
As to MAC Alias Delete function is used to let you remove an alias name to a  
MAC address. You can select an existed MAC address or alias name to  
remove.  
Fig. 3-39  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Parameter description:  
MAC Address:  
It is a six-byte long Ethernet hardware address and usually expressed by  
hex and separated by hyphens. For example,  
00 – 40 - C7 - D6 – 00 - 01  
Alias:  
MAC alias name you assign.  
Note: If there are too many MAC addresses learned in the table, we recommend  
you inputting the MAC address and alias name directly.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-12. GVRP Configuration  
GVRP is an application based on Generic Attribute Registration Protocol  
(GARP), mainly used to automatically and dynamically maintain the group  
membership information of the VLANs. The GVRP offers the function providing the  
VLAN registration service through a GARP application. It makes use of GARP  
Information Declaration (GID) to maintain the ports associated with their attribute  
database and GARP Information Propagation (GIP) to communicate among  
switches and end stations. With GID information and GIP, GVRP state machine  
maintain the contents of Dynamic VLAN Registration Entries for each VLAN and  
propagate these information to other GVRP-aware devices to setup and update  
their knowledge database, the set of VLANs associated with currently active  
members, and through which ports these members can be reached.  
In GVRP Configuration function folder, there are three functions supported,  
including GVRP Config, GVRP Counter and GVRP Group explained below.  
Fig. 3-40  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
GVRP Config  
Function description:  
In the function of GVRP Config, it is used to configure each port’s GVRP  
operation mode, in which there are seven parameters needed to be configured  
described below.  
Parameter description:  
GVRP State Setting:  
This function is simply to let you enable or disable GVRP function. You  
can pull down the list and click the <Downward> arrow key to choose  
“Enable” or “Disable”. Then, click the <Apply> button, the system will  
take effect immediately.  
Join Time:  
Used to declare the Join Time in unit of centisecond. Valid time range:  
20 –100 centisecond, Default: 20 centisecond.  
Leave Time:  
Used to declare the Leave Time in unit of centisecond. Valid time range:  
60 –300 centisecond, Default: 60 centisecond.  
Leave All Time:  
A time period for announcement that all registered device is going to be  
de-registered. If someone still issues a new join, then a registration will  
be kept in the switch. Valid range: 1000-5000 unit time, Default: 1000 unit  
time.  
Default Applicant Mode:  
The mode here means the type of participant. There are two modes,  
normal participant and non-participant, provided for the user’s choice.  
Normal:  
It is Normal Participant. In this mode, the switch participates  
normally in GARP protocol exchanges. The default setting is  
Normal.  
Non-Participant:  
It is Non-Participant. In this mode, the switch does not send or  
reply any GARP messages. It just listens messages and  
reacts for the received GVRP BPDU.  
Default Registrar Mode:  
The mode here means the type of Registrar. There are three types of  
parameters for registrar administrative control value, normal registrar,  
fixed registrar and forbidden registrar, provided for the user’s choice.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Normal:  
It is Normal Registration. The Registrar responds normally to  
incoming GARP messages. The default setting is Normal.  
Fixed:  
It is Registration Fixed. The Registrar ignores all GARP  
messages, and all members remain in the registered (IN)  
state.  
Forbidden:  
It is Registration Forbidden. The Registrar ignores all GARP  
messages, and all members remain in the unregistered  
(EMPTY) state.  
Restricted Mode:  
This function is used to restrict dynamic VLAN be created when this port  
received GVRP PDU. There are two modes, disable and enable,  
provided for the user’s choice.  
Disabled:  
In this mode, the switch dynamic VLAN will be created when  
this port received GVRP PDU. The default setting is Normal.  
Enabled:  
In this mode, the switch does not create dynamic VLAN when  
this port received GVRP PDU. Except received dynamic  
VLAN message of the GVRP PDU is an existed static VLAN in  
the switch, this port will be added into the static VLAN  
members dynamically.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
GVRP Counter  
Function description:  
All GVRP counters are mainly divided into Received and Transmitted two  
categories to let you monitor the GVRP actions. Actually, they are GARP  
packets.  
Fig. 3-41  
Parameter description:  
Received:  
Total GVRP Packets:  
Total GVRP BPDU is received by the GVRP application.  
Invalid GVRP Packets:  
Number of invalid GARP BPDU is received by the GARP  
application.  
LeaveAll Message Packets:  
Number of GARP BPDU with Leave All message is received by the  
GARP application.  
JoinEmpty Message Packets:  
Number of GARP BPDU with Join Empty message is received by  
the GARP application.  
JoinIn Message Packets:  
Number of GARP BPDU with Join In message is received by the  
GARP application.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
LeaveEmpty Message Packets:  
Number of GARP BPDU with Leave Empty message is received by  
the GARP application.  
Empty Message Packets:  
Number of GARP BPDU with Empty message is received by the  
GARP application.  
Transmitted:  
Total GVRP Packets:  
Total GARP BPDU is transmitted by the GVRP application.  
Invalid GVRP Packets:  
Number of invalid GARP BPDU is transmitted by the GVRP  
application.  
LeaveAll Message Packets:  
Number of GARP BPDU with Leave All message is transmitted  
by the GARP application.  
JoinEmpty Message Packets:  
Number of GARP BPDU with Join Empty message is transmitted by  
the GARP application.  
JoinIn Message Packets:  
Number of GARP BPDU with Join In message is transmitted by the  
GARP application.  
LeaveEmpty Message Packets:  
Number of GARP BPDU with Leave Empty message is transmitted  
by the GARP application.  
Empty Message Packets:  
Number of GARP BPDU with Empty message is transmitted by the  
GARP application.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
GVRP Group Information  
Function description:  
To show the dynamic group member and their information.  
Parameter description:  
VID:  
VLAN identifier. When GVRP group creates, each dynamic VLAN group  
owns its VID. Valid range is 1 ~ 4094.  
Member Port:  
Those are the members belonging to the same dynamic VLAN group.  
Edit Administrative Control:  
When you create GVRP group, you can use Administrative Control  
function to change Applicant Mode and Registrar Mode of GVRP group  
member.  
Refresh:  
Refresh function can help you to see current GVRP group status.  
Fig. 3-42  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-13. STP Configuration  
The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is a standardized method (IEEE 802.1D)  
for avoiding loops in switched networks. When STP is enabled, ensure that only  
one path is active between any two nodes on the network at a time. User can  
enable Spanning Tree Protocol on switch’s web management and then set up other  
advanced items. We recommend that you enable STP on all switches to ensure a  
single active path on the network.  
3-13-1. STP Status  
Function name:  
STP Status  
Function description:  
In the Spanning Tree Status, user can read 12 parameters to know STP  
current status. The 12 parameters’ description is listed in the following table.  
Parameter description:  
STP State:  
Show the current STP Enabled / Disabled status. Default is “Disabled”.  
Bridge ID:  
Show switch’s bridge ID which stands for the MAC address of this switch.  
Bridge Priority:  
Show this switch’s current bridge priority setting. Default is 32768.  
Designated Root:  
Show root bridge ID of this network segment. If this switch is a root  
bridge, the “Designated Root” will show this switch’s bridge ID.  
Designated Priority:  
Show the current root bridge priority.  
Root Port:  
Show port number connected to root bridge with the lowest path cost.  
Root Path Cost:  
Show the path cost between the root port and the designated port of the  
root bridge.  
Current Max. Age:  
Show the current root bridge maximum age time. Maximum age time is  
used to monitor if STP topology needs to change. When a bridge does  
not receive a hello message from root bridge until the maximum age time  
is counted down to 0, the bridge will treat the root bridge malfunctioned  
and issue a Topology Change Notification (TCN) BPDU to all other  
bridges.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
All bridges in the LAN will re-learn and determine which the root bridge is.  
Maximum Age time is assigned by root bridge in unit of seconds. Default  
is 20 seconds.  
Current Forward Delay:  
Show the current root bridge forward delay time. The value of Forward  
Delay time is set by root. The Forward Delay time is defined as the time  
spent from Listening state moved to Learning state or from Learning  
state moved to Forwarding state of a port in bridge.  
Hello Time:  
Show the current hello time of the root bridge. Hello time is a time  
interval specified by root bridge, used to request all other bridges  
periodically sending hello message every “hello time” seconds to the  
bridge attached to its designated port.  
STP Topology Change Count:  
STP Topology Change Count expresses the time spent in unit of seconds  
since the beginning of the Spanning Tree Topology Change to the end of  
the STP convergence. Once the STP change is converged, the Topology  
Change count will be reset to 0. The figures showing in the screen may  
not be the exact time it spent but very close to, because the time is  
eclipsing.  
Time Since Last Topology Change:  
Time Since Last Topology Change is the accumulated time in unit of  
seconds the STP has been since the last STP Topology Change was  
made. When Topology Change is initiated again, this counter will be  
reset to 0. And it will also count again once STP topology Change is  
completed.  
Fig. 3-43  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-13-2. STP Configuration  
The STP, Spanning Tree Protocol, actually includes RSTP. In the Spanning  
Tree Configuration, there are six parameters open for the user to configure as  
user’s idea. Each parameter description is listed below.  
Function name:  
STP Configuration  
Function description:  
User can set the following Spanning Tree parameters to control STP function  
enable/disable, select mode RSTP/STP and affect STP state machine  
behavior to send BPDU in this switch. The default setting of Spanning Tree  
Protocol is “Disable”.  
Parameter description:  
Spanning Tree Protocol:  
Set 802.1W Rapid STP function Enable / Disable. Default is “Disable”  
Bridge Priority:  
The lower the bridge priority is, the higher priority it has. Usually, the  
bridge with the highest bridge priority is the root. If you want to have the  
GS-2124C as root bridge, you can set this value lower than that of bridge  
in the LAN. The valid value is 0 ~ 61440. The default is 32768.  
Hello Time:  
Hello Time is used to determine the periodic time to send normal BPDU  
from designated ports among bridges. It decides how long a bridge  
should send this message to other bridge to tell I am alive. When the  
GS-2124C is the root bridge of the LAN, for example, all other bridges  
will use the hello time assigned by this switch to communicate with each  
other. The valid value is 1 ~ 10 in unit of second.  
Default is 2 seconds.  
Max. Age:  
When the GS-2124C is the root bridge, the whole LAN will apply this  
figure set by this switch as their maximum age time. When a bridge  
received a BPDU originated from the root bridge and if the message age  
conveyed in the BPDU exceeds the Max. Age of the root bridge, the  
bridge will treat the root bridge malfunctioned and issue a Topology  
Change Notification (TCN) BPDU to all other bridges. All bridges in the  
LAN will re-calculate and determine who the root bridge is. The valid  
value of Max. Age is 6 ~ 40 seconds. Default is 20 seconds.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Forward Delay:  
You can set the root bridge forward delay time. This figure is set by root  
bridge only. The forward delay time is defined as the time spent from  
Listening state moved to Learning state and also from Learning state  
moved to Forwarding state of a port in bridge. The forward delay time  
contains two states, Listening state to Learning state and Learning state  
to Forwarding state. It assumes that forward delay time is 15 seconds,  
then total forward delay time will be 30 seconds. This has much to do  
with the STP convergent time which will be more than 30 seconds  
because some other factors.  
The valid value is 4 ~ 30 seconds, default is 15 seconds.  
Force Version:  
Two options are offered for the user’s choosing STP algorithm. One is  
RSTP and the other is STP. If STP is chosen, RSTP will run as a legacy  
STP. The switch supports RSTP (802.1w) which is backward compatible  
with STP (802.1d).  
Fig. 3-44  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-13-3. STP Port Configuration  
Function name:  
STP Port Setting  
Function description:  
In the STP Port Setting, one item selection and five parameters settings are  
offered for user’s setup. User can disable and enable each port by selecting  
each Port Status item. User also can set “Path Cost” and “Priority” of each port  
by filling in the desired value and set “Admin Edge Port” and “Admin Point To  
Point” by selecting the desired item.  
Parameter description:  
Port Status:  
It displays the current state of a port. We cannot manually set it because  
it displays the status only. There are three possible states. ( according to  
802.1w specification)  
DISCARDING state indicates that this port can neither forward packets  
nor contribute learning knowledge.  
Notice: Three other states (Disable state, BLOCKING state and LISTENING  
state) defined in the 802.1d specification are now all represented as  
DISCARDING state.  
LEARNING state indicates this port can now contribute its learning  
knowledge but cannot forward packets still.  
FORWARDING state indicates this port can both contribute its learning  
knowledge and forward packets normally.  
Path Cost Status:  
It is the contribution value of the path through this port to Root Bridge.  
STP algorithm determines a best path to Root Bridge by calculating the  
sum of path cost contributed by all ports on this path. A port with a  
smaller path cost value would become the Root Port more possibly.  
Configured Path Cost:  
The range is 0 – 200,000,000. In the switch, if path cost is set to be zero,  
the STP will get the recommended value resulted from auto-negotiation  
of the link accordingly and display this value in the field of Path Cost  
Status. Otherwise, it may show the value that the administrator set up in  
Configured Path Cost and Path Cost Status.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
802.1w RSTP recommended value: (Valid range: 1 – 200,000,000)  
10 Mbps : 2,000,000  
100 Mbps : 200,000  
1 Gbps : 20,000  
Default: 0  
Priority:  
Priority here means Port Priority. Port Priority and Port Number are  
mixed to form the Port ID. Port IDs are often compared in order to  
determine which port of a bridge would become the Root Port. The range  
is 0 – 240.  
Default is 128.  
Admin Edge Port:  
If user selects “Yes”, this port will be an edge port. An Edge Port is a port  
connected to a device that knows nothing about STP or RSTP. Usually,  
the connected device is an end station. Edge Ports will immediately  
transit to forwarding state and skip the listening and learning state  
because the edge ports cannot create bridging loops in the network. This  
will expedite the convergence. When the link on the edge port toggles,  
the STP topology keeps unchanged. Unlike the designate port or root  
port though, an edge port will transit to a normal spanning-tree port  
immediately if it receives a BPDU.  
Default: No  
Admin Point To Point:  
We say a port is a point-to-point link, from RSTP’s view, if it is in full-  
duplex mode but is shared link if it is in half-duplex mode. RSTP fast  
convergence can only happen on point-to-point links and on edge ports.  
This can expedite the convergence because this will have the port fast  
transited to forwarding state.  
There are three parameters, Auto, True and False, used to configure the  
type of the point-to-point link. If configure this parameter to be Auto, it  
means RSTP will use the duplex mode resulted from the auto-negotiation.  
In today’s switched networks, most links are running in full-duplex mode.  
For sure, the result may be half-duplex, in this case, the port will not fast  
transit to Forwarding state. If it is set as True, the port is treated as point-  
to-point link by RSTP and unconditionally transited to Forwarding state. If  
it is set as False, fast transition to Forwarding state will not happen on  
this port.  
Default: Auto  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
M Check:  
Migration Check. It forces the port sending out an RSTP BPDU instead  
of a legacy STP BPDU at the next transmission. The only benefit of this  
operation is to make the port quickly get back to act as an RSTP port.  
Click <M Check> button to send a RSTP BPDU from the port you  
specified.  
Fig. 3-45  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-14. Trunking Configuration  
The Port Trunking Configuration is used to configure the settings of Link  
Aggregation. You can bundle more than one port with the same speed, full duplex  
and the same MAC to be a single logical port, thus the logical port aggregates the  
bandwidth of these ports. This means you can apply your current Ethernet  
equipments to build the bandwidth aggregation. For example, if there are three  
Fast Ethernet ports aggregated in a logical port, then this logical port has bandwidth  
three times as high as a single Fast Ethernet port has.  
The switch supports two kinds of port trunking methods:  
LACP:  
Ports using Link Aggregation Control Protocol (according to IEEE  
802.3ad specification) as their trunking method can choose their unique  
LACP GroupID (1~8) to form a logic “trunked port”. The benefit of using  
LACP is that a port makes an agreement with its peer port before it  
becomes a ready member of a “trunk group” (also called aggregator).  
LACP is safer than the other trunking method - static trunk.  
The switch LACP does not support the followings:  
Link Aggregation across switches  
Aggregation with non-IEEE 802.3 MAC link  
Operating in half-duplex mode  
Aggregate the ports with different data rates  
Static Trunk:  
Ports using Static Trunk as their trunk method can choose their unique  
Static GroupID (also 1~8, this Static groupID can be the same with  
another LACP groupID) to form a logic “trunked port”. The benefit of  
using Static Trunk method is that a port can immediately become a  
member of a trunk group without any handshaking with its peer port. This  
is also a disadvantage because the peer ports of your static trunk group  
may not know that they should be aggregate together to form a “logic  
trunked port”. Using Static Trunk on both end of a link is strongly  
recommended. Please also note that low speed links will stay in “not  
ready” state when using static trunk to aggregate with high speed links.  
As to system restrictions about the port aggregation function on the switch,  
In the management point of view, the switch supports maximum 8 trunk groups for  
LACP and additional 8 trunk groups for Static Trunk. But in the system capability  
view, only 8 “real trunked” groups are supported. An LACP trunk group with more  
than one ready member-ports is a “real trunked” group. An LACP trunk group with  
only one or less than one ready member-ports is not a “real trunked” group. Any  
Static trunk group is a “real trunked” group.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Per Trunking Group supports a maximum of 12 ready member-ports. Please  
note that some decisions will automatically be made by the system while you are  
configuring your trunking ports. Some configuration examples are listed below:  
a) 12 ports have already used Static Trunk Group ID 1, the 13th port  
willing to use the same Static Trunk Group ID will be automatically set  
to use the “None” trunking method and its Group ID will turn to 0. This  
means the port won’t aggregate with other ports.  
b) 14 ports all use LACP Trunk Group ID 1 at most 12 ports can  
aggregate together and transit into the ready state.  
c) A port using the “None“ trunking method or Group ID 0 will be  
automatically set to use the “None” trunking method with Group ID 0.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
Port Setting/Status  
Function description:  
Port setting/status is used to configure the trunk property of each and every  
port in the switch system.  
Parameter description:  
Method:  
This determines the method a port uses to aggregate with other ports.  
None:  
A port does not want to aggregate with any other port should  
choose this default setting.  
LACP:  
A port use LACP as its trunk method to get aggregated with other  
ports also using LACP.  
Static:  
A port use Static Trunk as its trunk method to get aggregated with  
other ports also using Static Trunk.  
Group:  
Ports choosing the same trunking method other than “None” must be  
assigned a unique Group number (i.e. Group ID, valid value is from 1 to  
8) in order to declare that they wish to aggregate with each other.  
Active LACP:  
This field is only referenced when a port’s trunking method is LACP.  
Active:  
An Active LACP port begins to send LACPDU to its link partner right  
after the LACP protocol entity started to take control of this port.  
Passive:  
A Passive LACP port will not actively send LACPDU out before it  
receives an LACPDU from its link partner.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Aggtr:  
Aggtr is an abbreviation of “aggregator”. Every port is also an aggregator,  
and its own aggregator ID is the same as its own Port No. We can regard  
an aggregator as a representative of a trunking group. Ports with same  
Group ID and using same trunking method will have the opportunity to  
aggregate to a particular aggregator port. This aggregator port is usually  
the port with the smallest Port No. within the trunking group.  
Status:  
This field represents the trunking status of a port which uses a trunking  
method other than “None”. It also represents the management link status  
of a port which uses the “None” trunking method. “---“ means “not ready”  
Fig.3-46  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
Aggregator View  
Function description:  
To display the current port trunking information from the aggregator point of  
view.  
Parameter description:  
Aggregator:  
It shows the aggregator ID (from 1 to 24) of every port. In fact, every port  
is also an aggregator, and its own aggregator ID is the same as its own  
Port No..  
Method:  
Show the method a port uses to aggregate with other ports.  
Member Ports:  
Show all member ports of an aggregator (port).  
Ready Ports:  
Show only the ready member ports within an aggregator (port).  
Fig.3-47  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
LACP Detail (LACP Aggregator Detailed Information)  
Function description:  
Show the detailed information of the LACP trunking group.  
Parameter description:  
Actor:  
The switch you are watching on.  
Partner:  
The peer system from this aggregator’s view.  
System Priority:  
Show the System Priority part of a system ID.  
MAC Address:  
Show the MAC Address part of a system ID.  
Port:  
Show the port number part of an LACP port ID.  
Key:  
Show the key value of the aggregator. The key value is determined by  
the LACP protocol entity and can’t be set through management.  
Trunk Status:  
Show the trunk status of a single member port.”---“ means “not ready”  
Fig. 4-48  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
LACP System Priority  
Function description:  
It is used to set the priority part of the LACP system ID. LACP will only  
aggregate together the ports whose peer link partners are all on a single  
system. Each system supports LACP will be assigned a globally unique  
System Identifier for this purpose. A system ID is a 64-bit field comprising a  
48-bit MAC Address and 16-bit priority value. The System Priority can be set  
by the user. Its range is from 1 to 65535. Default: 32768  
Fig.3-49  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-15. 802.1x Configuration  
802.1x port-based network access control provides a method to restrict users  
to access network resources via authenticating user’s information. This restricts  
users from gaining access to the network resources through a 802.1x-enabled port  
without authentication. If a user wishes to touch the network through a port under  
802.1x control, he (she) must firstly input his (her) account name for authentication  
and waits for gaining authorization before sending or receiving any packets from a  
802.1x-enabled port.  
Before the devices or end stations can access the network resources through  
the ports under 802.1x control, the devices or end stations connected to a controlled  
port send the authentication request to the authenticator, the authenticator pass the  
request to the authentication server to authenticate and verify, and the server tell  
the authenticator if the request get the grant of authorization for the ports.  
According to IEEE802.1x, there are three components implemented. They  
are Authenticator, Supplicant and Authentication server shown in Fig. 3-50.  
Supplicant:  
It is an entity being authenticated by an authenticator. It is used to  
communicate with the Authenticator PAE (Port Access Entity) by  
exchanging the authentication message when the Authenticator PAE  
request to it.  
Authenticator:  
An entity facilitates the authentication of the supplicant entity. It controls  
the state of the port, authorized or unauthorized, according to the result  
of authentication message exchanged between it and a supplicant PAE.  
The authenticator may request the supplicant to re-authenticate itself at a  
configured time period. Once start re-authenticating the supplicant, the  
controlled port keeps in the authorized state until re-authentication fails.  
A port acting as an authenticator is thought to be two logical ports, a  
controlled port and an uncontrolled port. A controlled port can only pass  
the packets when the authenticator PAE is authorized, and otherwise, an  
uncontrolled port will unconditionally pass the packets with PAE group  
MAC address, which has the value of 01-80-c2-00-00-03 and will not be  
forwarded by MAC bridge, at any time.  
Authentication server:  
A device provides authentication service, through EAP, to an  
authenticator by using authentication credentials supplied by the  
supplicant to determine if the supplicant is authorized to access the  
network resource.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
The overview of operation flow for the Fig. 3-50 is quite simple. When  
Supplicant PAE issues a request to Authenticator PAE, Authenticator and  
Supplicant exchanges authentication message. Then, Authenticator  
passes the request to RADIUS server to verify. Finally, RADIUS server  
replies if the request is granted or denied.  
While in the authentication process, the message packets, encapsulated  
by Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL), are exchanged  
between an authenticator PAE and a supplicant PAE. The Authenticator  
exchanges the message to authentication server using EAP  
encapsulation. Before successfully authenticating, the supplicant can  
only touch the authenticator to perform authentication message  
exchange or access the network from the uncontrolled port.  
Supplicant’s  
System  
Authentication  
Authenticator’s System  
Server’s System  
Services Offered  
by Authenticator  
(e.g Bridge Relay)  
Supplicant  
PAE  
Authenticator  
PAE  
Authentication  
Server  
Controlled port  
Uncontrolled port  
Port Authorize  
MAC Enable  
LAN  
Fig. 3-50  
In the Fig. 3-51, this is the typical configuration, a single supplicant, an  
authenticator and an authentication server. B and C is in the internal network, D is  
Authentication server running RADIUS, switch at the central location acts  
Authenticator connecting to PC A and A is a PC outside the controlled port, running  
Supplicant PAE. In this case, PC A wants to access the services on device B and C,  
first, it must exchange the authentication message with the authenticator on the port  
it connected via EAPOL packet. The authenticator transfers the supplicant’s  
credentials to Authentication server for verification. If success, the authentication  
server will notice the authenticator the grant. PC A, then, is allowed to access B and  
C via the switch. If there are two switches directly connected together instead of  
single one, for the link connecting two switches, it may have to act two port roles at  
the end of the link: authenticator and supplicant, because the traffic is bi-directional.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Authentication server  
C
Fig. 3-51  
Authenticator  
B
Supplicant A  
The Fig. 3-52 shows the procedure of 802.1x authentication. There are steps  
for the login based on 802.1x port access control management. The protocol used  
in the right side is EAPOL and the left side is EAP.  
1.  
At the initial stage, the supplicant A is unauthenticated and a port  
on switch acting as an authenticator is in unauthorized state. So the  
access is blocked in this stage.  
2.  
Initiating a session. Either authenticator or supplicant can initiate  
the message exchange. If supplicant initiates the process, it sends  
EAPOL-start packet to the authenticator PAE and authenticator will  
immediately respond EAP-Request/Identity packet.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
The authenticator always periodically sends EAP-Request/Identity  
to the supplicant for requesting the identity it wants to be  
authenticated.  
If the authenticator doesn’t send EAP-Request/Identity, the  
supplicant will initiate EAPOL-Start the process by sending to the  
authenticator.  
And next, the Supplicant replies an EAP-Response/Identity to the  
authenticator. The authenticator will embed the user ID into Radius-  
Access-Request command and send it to the authentication server  
for confirming its identity.  
6.  
7.  
After receiving the Radius-Access-Request, the authentication  
server sends Radius-Access-Challenge to the supplicant for asking  
for inputting user password via the authenticator PAE.  
The supplicant will convert user password into the credential  
information, perhaps, in MD5 format and replies an EAP-Response  
with this credential information as well as the specified  
authentication algorithm (MD5 or OTP) to Authentication server via  
the authenticator PAE. As per the value of the type field in message  
PDU, the authentication server knows which algorithm should be  
applied to authenticate the credential information, EAP-MD5  
(Message Digest 5) or EAP-OTP (One Time Password) or other  
else algorithm.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
8.  
9.  
If user ID and password is correct, the authentication server will  
send a Radius-Access-Accept to the authenticator. If not correct,  
the authentication server will send a Radius-Access-Reject.  
When the authenticator PAE receives a Radius-Access-Accept, it  
will send an EAP-Success to the supplicant. At this time, the  
supplicant is authorized and the port connected to the supplicant  
and under 802.1x control is in the authorized state. The supplicant  
and other devices connected to this port can access the network. If  
the authenticator receives a Radius-Access-Reject, it will send an  
EAP-Failure to the supplicant. This means the supplicant is failed to  
authenticate. The port it connected is in the unauthorized state, the  
supplicant and the devices connected to this port won’t be allowed  
to access the network.  
10. When the supplicant issue an EAP-Logoff message to  
Authentication server, the port you are using is set to be  
unauthorized.  
Bridge  
LAN  
Radius Server  
PC  
Port connect  
Access blocked  
EAPOL-Start  
EAPOL  
EAP  
Radius  
Authenticator  
EAP-Request/Identity  
EAP-Response/Identity  
Radius-Access-Request  
Radius-Access-Challenge  
EAP-Request  
Radius-Access-Request  
Radius-Access-Accept  
EAP-Response (cred)  
EAP-Success  
EAP-Failure  
EAP-Logoff  
Access allowed  
Fig. 3-52  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Only MultiHost 802.1X is the type of authentication supported in the switch.  
In this mode, for the devices connected to this port, once a supplicant is authorized,  
the devices connected to this port can access the network resource through this  
port.  
802.1x Port-based Network Access Control function supported by the switch  
is little bit complex, for it just support basic Multihost mode, which can distinguish  
the device’s MAC address and its VID. The following table is the summary of the  
combination of the authentication status and the port status versus the status of port  
mode, set in 802.1x Port mode, port control state, set in 802.1x port setting. Here  
Entry Authorized means MAC entry is authorized.  
Port Mode  
Port Control  
Don’t Care  
Auto  
Auto  
ForceUnauthorized Don’t Care  
ForceAuthorized Don’t Care  
Authentication  
Port Status  
Disable  
Don’t Care  
Successful  
Failure  
Port Uncontrolled  
Port Authorized  
Port Unauthorized  
Port Unauthorized  
Port Authorized  
Multihost  
Multihost  
Multihost  
Multihost  
Table 3-3  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
802.1x State Setting  
Function description:  
This function is used to configure the global parameters for RADIUS  
authentication in 802.1x port security application.  
Parameter description:  
Radius Server:  
RADIUS server IP address for authentication.  
Default: 192.168.1.1  
Port Number:  
The port number to communicate with RADIUS server for the  
authentication service. The valid value ranges 1-65535.  
Default port number is 1812.  
Secret Key:  
The secret key between authentication server and authenticator. It is a  
string with the length 1 – 31 characters. The character string may contain  
upper case, lower case and 0-9. It is character sense. It is not allowed for  
putting a blank between any two characters.  
Default: Radius  
Fig. 3-53  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
802.1x Mode Setting  
Function description:  
Set the operation mode of 802.1X for each port. In this device, it supports only  
Multi-host operation mode.  
Parameter description:  
Port Number:  
Indicate which port is selected to configure the 802.1x operation mode.  
802.1x Mode:  
802.1x operation mode. There are two options, including Disable and  
Multi-host mode. Default is Disable.  
Disable  
It will have the chosen port acting as a plain port, that is no 802.1x  
port access control works on the port.  
802.1x with Multi-host  
In Multi-host mode, for the devices connected to this port, once a  
supplicant is authorized, the devices connected to this port can access  
the network resource through this port.  
Fig. 3-54  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
Port Security Management  
Function description:  
Shows each port status. In Multihost mode, it shows the port number and its  
status, authorized or unauthorized.  
Parameter description:  
Disable Mode:  
When selecting Disable mode for a port in the function 802.1X Port Mode  
Configuration, the port is in the uncontrolled port state and does not  
apply 802.1X authenticator on it. Any node attached on this port can  
access the network without the admittance of 802.1X authenticator. The  
Port Status will show the following screen.  
Port Number:  
The port number to be chosen to show its 802.1X Port Status. The valid  
number is Port 1 – 24.  
Port Status:  
The current 802.1X status of the port. In Disable mode, this field is  
Disabled.  
802.1x with Multihost mode:  
When selecting 802.1x with Multihost mode for a port in the function  
802.1X Port Mode Configuration, Devices can access the network  
through this port once the authenticator is authorized. The Port Status  
will show the following screen. If the port is granted to access the  
network, the port status is authorized, otherwise, unauthorized.  
Fig. 3-55  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
Param. Setting  
Function description:  
This function is used to configure the parameters for each port in 802.1x port  
security application. Refer to the following parameters description for details.  
Parameter description:  
Port:  
It is the port number to be selected for configuring its associated 802.1x  
parameters which are Port control, reAuthMax, txPeriod, Quiet Period,  
reAuthEnabled, reAuthPeriod, max. Request, suppTimeout,  
serverTimeout and Controlled direction.  
Port Control:  
This is used to set the operation mode of authorization. There are three  
type of operation mode supported, ForceUnauthorized, ForceAuthorized,  
Auto.  
ForceUnauthorized:  
The controlled port is forced to hold in the unauthorized state.  
ForceAuthorized:  
The controlled port is forced to hold in the authorized state.  
Auto:  
The controlled port is set to be in authorized state or unauthorized  
state depends on the result of the authentication exchange between  
the authentication server and the supplicant.  
Default: Auto  
reAuthMax(1-10):  
The number of authentication attempt that is permitted before the port  
becomes unauthorized.  
Default: 2  
txPeriod(1-65535 s):  
A time period to transmitted EAPOL PDU between the authenticator and  
the supplicant.  
Default: 30  
Quiet Period(0-65535 s):  
A period of time during which we will not attempt to access the supplicant.  
Deafult: 60 seconds  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
reAuthEnabled:  
Choose whether regular authentication will take place in this port.  
Default: ON  
reAuthPeriod(1-65535 s):  
A non-zero number seconds between the periodic re-authentication of  
the supplicant.  
Default: 3600  
max. Request(1-10):  
The maximum of number times that the authenticator will retransmit an  
EAP Request to the supplicant before it times out the authentication  
session. The valid range: 1 – 10.  
Default: 2 times  
suppTimeout(1-65535 s):  
A timeout condition in the exchange between the authenticator and the  
supplicant. The valid range: 1 –65535.  
Default: 30 seconds.  
serverTimeout(1-65535 s):  
A timeout condition in the exchange between the authenticator and the  
authentication server. The valid range: 1 –65535.  
Default: 30 seconds  
Fig. 3-56  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-16. Alarm Configuration  
Alarm Configuration  
Events Configuration  
Email/SMS Configuration  
Function name:  
Events Configuration  
Function description:  
The Trap Events Configuration function is used to enable the switch to send  
out the trap information while pre-defined trap events occurred. The switch  
offers 24 different trap events to users for switch management. The trap  
information can be sent out in three ways, including email, mobile phone SMS  
(short message system) and trap. The message will be sent while users tick  
() the trap event individually on the web page shown as below.  
Parameter description:  
These trap functions are as they describe. The special one is Module Swap. It  
means that when the switch detects a module with the different module ID to  
be inserted, the switch treats it as Module swapped. The traps that the switch  
supports are listed below.  
STP: STP Topology Changed, STP Disabled, STP Enabled  
LACP: LACP Disabled, LACP Enabled, LACP Member Added,  
LACP Port Failure  
GVRP: GVRP Disabled, GVRP Enabled  
VLAN: VLAN Disabled, Port-based VLAN Enabled, Tag-based VLAN  
Enabled, Metro-mode Vlan Enabled, Double-tag Vlan Enabled  
Module Swap: Module Inserted, Module Removed, Dual Media Swapped  
Trap: Cold Start, Warm Start, Link Down, Link Up, Authentication  
Failure, User login, User logout  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Fig. 3-57  
Function name:  
Email/SMS Configuration  
Function description:  
Alarm configuration is used to configure the persons who should receive the  
alarm message via either email or SMS, or both. It depends on your settings.  
An email address or a mobile phone number has to be set in the web page of  
alarm configuration (See Fig. 3-58). Then, user can read the trap information  
from the email or the mobile phone. This function provides 6 email addresses  
and 6 mobile phone numbers at most. The 24 different trap events will be sent  
out to SNMP Manager when trap event occurs. After ticking trap events, you  
can fill in your desired email addresses and mobile phone numbers. Then,  
please click <Apply> button to complete the alarm configuration. It will take  
effect in a few seconds.  
Note: SMS may not work in your mobile phone system. It is customized for different  
systems.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Parameter description:  
Email:  
Mail Server: the IP address of the server transferring your email.  
Username: your username on the mail server.  
Password: your password on the mail server.  
Email Address 1 – 6: email address that would like to receive the  
alarm message.  
SMS:  
SMS Server: the IP address of the server transferring your SMS.  
Username: your username in ISP.  
Password: your username in ISP.  
Mobile Phone 1-6: the mobile phone number that would like to  
receive the alarm message.  
Fig. 3-58  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-17. Configuration  
The switch supports three copies of configuration, including the default  
configuration, working configuration and user configuration for your configuration  
management. All of them are listed and described below respectively.  
Default Configuration:  
This is the ex-factory setting and cannot be altered.  
Working Configuration:  
It is the configuration you are using currently and can be changed any time.  
The configurations you are using are saved into this configuration file. This is  
updated each time as you press <Apply> button.  
User Configuration:  
It is the configuration file for the specified or backup purposes and can be  
updated while having confirmed the configuration. You can retrieve it by performing  
Restore User Configuration.  
Fig. 3-59  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-17-1. Save/Restore  
Function name:  
Save As Start Configuration  
Function description:  
Save the current configuration as a start configuration file in flash memory.  
Fig. 3-60  
Function name:  
Save As User Configuration  
Function description:  
Save the current configuration as a user configuration file in flash memory.  
Fig. 3-61  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
Restore Default Configuration  
Function description:  
Restore Default Configuration function can retrieve the ex-factory setting to  
replace the start configuration.  
Fig. 3-62  
Function name:  
Restore User Configuration  
Function description:  
Restore User Configuration function can retrieve the previous confirmed  
working configuration stored in the flash memory to update start configuration.  
When completing to restore the configuration, the system’s start configuration  
is updated and will be changed its system settings after rebooting the system.  
Fig. 3-63  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-17-2. Config File  
Function name:  
Config File  
Function description:  
With this function, user can back up or reload the config files of Save As Start  
or Save As User via TFTP.  
Parameter description:  
Export File Path:  
Export Start:  
Export Save As Start’s config file stored in the flash.  
Export User-Conf:  
Export Save As User’s config file stored in the flash.  
Import File Path:  
Import Start:  
Import Save As Start’s config file stored in the flash.  
Import User-Conf:  
Import Save As User’s config file stored in the flash.  
Fig. 3-64  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-18. Diagnostics  
Three functions, including Diagnostics, Loopback Test and Ping Test are  
contained in this function folder for device self-diagnostics. Each of them will be  
described in detail orderly in the following sections.  
Diagnostics  
Diagnostics  
Loopback Test  
Ping Test  
Function name:  
Diagnostics  
Function description:  
Diagnostics function provides a set of basic system diagnosis. It let users  
know that whether the system is health or needs to be fixed. The basic system  
check includes EEPROM test, UART test, DRAM test and Flash test.  
Fig. 3-65  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
Loopback Test  
Function description:  
In the Loopback Test function, there are two different loopback tests. One is  
Internal Loopback Test and the other is External Loopback Test. The former  
test function will not send the test signal outside the switch box. The test signal  
only wraps around in the switch box. As to the latter test function, it will send  
the test signal to its link partner. If you do not have them connected to active  
network devices, i.e. the ports are link down, the switch will report the port  
numbers failed. If they all are ok, it just shows OK.  
Note: Whatever you choose Internal Loopback Test or External Loopback Test,  
these two functions will interfere with the normal system working, and all  
packets in sending and receiving also will stop temporarily.  
Fig. 3-66  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Function name:  
Ping Test  
Function description:  
Ping Test function is a tool for detecting if the target device is alive or not  
through ICMP protocol which abounds with report messages. The switch  
provides Ping Test function to let you know that if the target device is available  
or not. You can simply fill in a known IP address and then click <Ping> button.  
After a few seconds later, the switch will report you the pinged device is alive  
or dead in the field of Ping Result.  
Parameter description:  
IP Address:  
An IP address with the version of v4, e.g. 192.168.1.1.  
Default Gateway:  
IP address of the default gateway.  
For more details, please see the section of IP address in Chapter 2.  
Fig. 3-67  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-19. TFTP Server  
Function name:  
TFTP Server  
Function description:  
Set up IP address of TFTP server.  
Parameter description:  
Specify the IP address where the TFTP server locates. Fill in the IP address of  
your TFTP server, then press <Apply> button to have the setting taken effect.  
Fig. 3-68  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-20. Log  
This function shows the log data. The switch provides system log data for  
users. There are 19 private trap logs, 5 public trap logs. The switch supports total  
120 log entries. For more details on log items, please refer to the section of  
Trap/Alarm Configuration and SNMP Configuration.  
Function name:  
Log Data  
Function description:  
The Trap Log Data is displaying the log items including all SNMP Private Trap  
events, SNMP Public traps and user logs occurred in the system. In the report  
table, No., Time and Events are three fields contained in each trap record.  
Fig. 3-69  
Parameter description:  
No.:  
Display the order number that the trap happened.  
Time:  
Display the time that the trap happened.  
Events:  
Display the trap event name.  
Auto Upload Enable:  
Switch the enabled or disabled status of the auto upload function.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Upload Log:  
Upload log data through tftp.  
Clear Log:  
Clear log data.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-21. Firmware Upgrade  
Software upgrade tool is used to help upgrade the software function in order  
to fix or improve the function. The switch provides a TFTP client for software  
upgrade. This can be done through Ethernet.  
Function name:  
Firmware Upgrade  
Function description:  
The switch supports TFTP upgrade tool for upgrading software. If you assure  
to upgrade software to a newer version one, you must follow two procedures:  
1.) Specifying the IP address where TFTP server locates. In this field, the IP  
address of your TFTP server should be filled in.  
2.) Specifying what the filename and where the file is. You must specify full path  
and filename.  
Once you press <Upgrade> button, the switch will prompt the screen for you  
to reconfirm. Then, the switch starts downloading software from TFTP server if you  
choose <OK> button. It will be just back to “Software Upgrade” if you choose  
<Cancel> button.  
If your download is not successful, the switch will also be back to “Software  
Upgrade”, and it will not upgrade the software as well.  
When download is completed, the switch starts upgrading software. A reboot  
message will be prompted after completing upgrading software. At this time, you  
must reboot the switch to have new software worked.  
Note: Software upgrade is hazardous if power is off. You must do it carefully.  
Parameter description:  
TFTP Server: A TFTP server stored the image file you want to upgrade.  
Path and Filename: File path and filename stored the image file you want to  
upgrade.  
Fig. 3-70  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-22. Reboot  
We offer you many ways to reboot the switch, including power up, hardware  
reset and software reset. You can press the RESET button in the front panel to  
reset the switch. After upgrading software, changing IP configuration or changing  
VLAN mode configuration, then you must reboot to have the new configuration  
taken effect. Here we are discussing is software reset for the “reboot” in the main  
menu.  
Function name:  
Reboot  
Function description:  
Reboot the switch. Reboot takes the same effect as the RESET button on the  
front panel of the switch. It will take around thirty (30) seconds to complete the  
system boot.  
Parameter description:  
Save and Reboot:  
Save the current settings as start configuration before rebooting the  
switch.  
Reboot:  
Reboot the system directly.  
Fig. 3-71  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
3-23. Logout  
You can manually logout by performing Logout function. In the switch, it  
provides another way to logout. You can configure it to logout automatically.  
Function name:  
Logout  
Function description:  
The switch allows you to logout the system to prevent other users from the  
system without the permission. If you do not logout and exit the browser, the  
switch will automatically have you logout. Besides this manually logout and  
implicit logout, you can pull down the <Auto Logout> list at the left-top corner  
to explicitly ON/OFF this logout function.  
Parameter description:  
Auto Logout:  
Default is ON. If it is “ON”, and no action and no key is stroke as well in  
any function screen more than 3 minutes, the switch will have you logout  
automatically.  
Fig. 3-72  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
4. Operation of CLI  
Management  
4-1. CLI Management  
Refer to Chapter 2 for basic installation. The following description is the brief of the  
network connection.  
-- Locate the correct DB-9 null modem cable with female DB-9 connector. Null  
modem cable comes with the management switch. Refer to the Appendix B for  
null modem cable configuration.  
-- Attach the DB-9 female connector to the male DB-9 serial port connector on the  
Management board.  
-- Attach the other end of the DB-9 cable to an ASCII terminal emulator or PC Com-  
1, 2 port. For example, PC runs Microsoft Windows HyperTerminal utility.  
-- At “Com Port Properties” Menu, configure the parameters as below: (see the next  
section)  
Baud rate  
Stop bits  
Data bits  
Parity  
57600  
1
8
N
Flow control  
none  
4-1-1. Login  
The command-line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface. User can access  
the CLI through either a direct serial connection to the device or a Telnet session.  
The default values of the managed switch are listed below:  
Username: admin  
Password: admin  
After you login successfully, the prompt will be shown as “#“ if you are the  
first login person and your authorization is administrator; otherwise it may show “$“.  
See the following two figures. The former means you behave as an administrator  
and have the access right of the system. As to the latter, it means you behave as a  
guest and are only allowed to view the system without the permission to do any  
setting for this switch.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Fig. 4-1  
Fig. 4-2  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
4-2. Commands of CLI  
To see the commands of the mode, please input “?” after the prompt, then all  
commands will be listed in the screen. All commands can be divided into two  
categories, including global commands and local commands. Global commands can  
be used wherever the mode you are. They are “exit”, “end”, “help”, “history”, “logout”,  
“save start”, “save user”, “restore default” and “restore user”. For more details,  
please refer to Section 4-2-1.  
Command instructions reside in the corresponding modes are local  
commands. The same command with the same command name may occur but  
perform totally different function in different modes. For example, “show” in IP mode  
performs displaying the IP information; however, it performs displaying the system  
information in system mode. For more details, please refer to Section 4-2-2.  
Fig. 4-3  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
4-2-1. Global Commands of CLI  
exit  
Syntax:  
exit  
Description:  
Back to the previous mode.  
When you enter this command, your current position would move back to the  
previous mode. If you use this command in the top mode, you are still in the position  
of the top mode.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C# trunk  
GS-2124C(trunk)# exit  
GS-2124C#  
end  
Syntax:  
end  
Description:  
Back to the top mode.  
When you enter this command, your current position would move to the top mode. If  
you use this command in the top mode, you are still in the position of the top mode.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C# alarm  
GS-2124C(alarm)# events  
GS-2124C(alarm-events)# end  
GS-2124C#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
help  
Syntax:  
help  
Description:  
To show available commands.  
Some commands are the combination of more than two words. When you enter this  
command, the CLI would show the complete commands. Besides, the command  
would help you classify the commands between the local commands and the global  
ones.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C# ip  
GS-2124C(ip)# help  
Commands available:  
------------<< Local commands >>------------  
set ip  
Set ip,subnet mask and gateway  
Set dns  
set dns  
enable dhcp  
disable dhcp  
show  
Enable DHCP, and set dns auto or manual  
Disable DHCP  
Show IP Configuration  
------------<< Global commands >>------------  
exit  
Back to the previous mode  
Back to the top mode  
end  
help  
Show available commands  
Show a list of previously run commands  
Logout the system  
history  
logout  
save start  
save user  
restore default  
restore user  
Save as start config  
Save as user config  
Restore default config  
Restore user config  
GS-2124C(ip)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
history  
Syntax:  
history [#]  
Description:  
To show a list of previous commands that you had ever run.  
When you enter this command, the CLI would show a list of commands which you  
had typed before. The CLI supports up to 256 records. If no argument is typed, the  
CLI would list total records up to 256. If optional argument is given, the CLI would  
only show the last numbers of records, given by the argument.  
Argument:  
[#]: show last number of history records. (optional)  
Possible value:  
[#]: 1, 2, 3, …., 256  
Example:  
GS-2124C(ip)# history  
Command history:  
0. trunk  
1. exit  
2. GS-2124C# trunk  
3. GS-2124C(trunk)# exit  
4. GS-2124C#  
5. ?  
6. trunk  
7. exit  
8. alarm  
9. events  
10. end  
11. ip  
12. help  
13. ip  
14. history  
GS-2124C(ip)# history 3  
Command history:  
13. ip  
14. history  
15. history 3  
GS-2124C(ip)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
logout  
Syntax:  
logout  
Description:  
When you enter this command via Telnet connection, you would logout the system  
and disconnect. If you connect the system through direct serial port with RS-232  
cable, you would logout the system and be back to the initial login prompt when you  
run this command.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
None.  
save start  
Syntax:  
save start  
Description:  
To save the current configuration as the start one. When you enter this command,  
the CLI would save your current configuration into the non-volatile FLASH. If you  
want the configuration still works after rebooting, save the configuration using the  
command ‘save stat’.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C# save start  
Saving start...  
Save Successfully  
GS-2124C#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
save user  
Syntax:  
save user  
Description:  
To save the current configuration as the user-defined configuration. When you enter  
this command, the CLI would save your current configuration into the non-volatile  
FLASH as user-defined configuration.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C# save user  
Saving user...  
Save Successfully  
GS-2124C#  
restore default  
Syntax:  
restore default  
Description:  
To restore the startup configuration as factory default configuration. If restoring  
default successfully, the CLI would prompt if reboot immediately or not. If you press  
Y or y, the system would reboot immediately; others would be back to the CLI  
system. After restoring default configuration, all the changes in the startup  
configuration would be lost. After rebooting, the entire startup configuration would  
reset to factory default.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C# restore default  
Restoring ...  
Restore Default Configuration Successfully  
Press any key to reboot system.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
restore user  
Syntax:  
restore user  
Description:  
To restore the startup configuration as user defined configuration. If restoring default  
successfully, the CLI would prompt if reboot immediately or not. If you press Y or y,  
the system would reboot immediately; others would back to the CLI system. After  
restoring user-defined configuration, all the changes in the startup configuration  
would be lost. After rebooting, the entire startup configuration would replace as user  
defined one.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C# restore user  
Restoring ...  
Restore User Configuration Successfully  
Press any key to reboot system.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
4-2-2. Local Commands of CLI  
system  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To display the basic information of the switch.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(system)# show  
Model Name  
: GS-2124C  
System Description  
Location  
: L2 Managed Switch  
:
Contact  
:
Device Name  
System Up Time  
Current Time  
BIOS Version  
Firmware Version  
: GS-2124C  
: 0 Days 1 Hours 19 Mins 17 Secs  
: Fri Nov 13 01:26:11 2004  
: v1.00  
: v0.95  
Hardware-Mechanical Version : v1.00-v1.00  
Series Number  
Host IP Address  
Host MAC Address  
Device Port  
* 2  
: 123456789012  
: 192.168.1.1  
: 00-40-c7-e7-00-04  
: UART * 1, TP * 22, Dual-Media Port(RJ45/SFP)  
RAM Size  
: 16 M  
: 2 M  
Flash Size  
set location  
Syntax:  
set location <location string>  
Description:  
To set the location description of the switch.  
Argument:  
String length up to 32 characters.  
Possible value:  
A, b, c, d, ... ,z and 1, 2, 3, …. etc.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(system)# set location Taipei  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set contact  
Syntax:  
set contact <contact string>  
Description:  
To set the contact description of the switch.  
Argument:  
String length up to 32 characters.  
Possible value:  
A, b, c, d, ... ,z and 1, 2, 3, …. etc.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(system)# set contact Taipei  
set device-name  
Syntax:  
set device-name <string>  
Description:  
To set the device name description of the switch.  
Argument:  
String length up to 32 characters.  
Possible value:  
A, b, c, d, ... ,z and 1, 2, 3, …. etc.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(system)# set device-name CR-2600  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
IP  
set ip  
Syntax:  
set ip <ip> <mask> <gateway>  
Description:  
To set the system IP address, subnet mask and gateway.  
Argument:  
<ip> : ip address  
<mask> : Subnet Mask  
<gateway> : Default Gateway  
Possible value:  
<ip> : 192.168.1.2 or others  
<mask> : 255.255.255.0 or others  
<gateway> : 192.168.1.253 or others  
Example:  
GS-2124C(ip)# set ip 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253  
set system IP address : 192.168.1.2  
subnet mask  
: 255.255.255.0  
default gateway : 192.168.1.253  
set dns  
Syntax:  
set dns <ip address>  
Description:  
To set the IP address of DNS server.  
Argument:  
<ip address> : dns ip address  
Possible value:  
168.95.1.1  
Example:  
GS-2124C (ip)# set dns 168.95.1.1  
set DNS server IP address to 168.95.1.1  
enable dhcp  
Syntax:  
enable dhcp <manual|auto>  
Description:  
To enable the system DHCP function and set DNS server via manual or auto mode.  
Argument:  
<manual|auto> : set dhcp by using manual or auto mode.  
Possible value:  
Manual or auto  
Example:  
GS-2124C(ip)# enable dhcp manual  
: Enabled system DHCP function and set DNS server via manual mode.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
disable dhcp  
Syntax:  
disable dhcp  
Description:  
To disable the DHCP function of the system.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(ip)# disable dhcp  
: Disabled system DHCP function.  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To display the system’s DHCP function state, IP address, subnet mask, default  
gateway, DNS mode, DNS server IP address and current IP address.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(ip)# show  
DHCP  
: Disable  
IP Address  
Subnet mask  
Gateway  
: 192.168.2.65  
: 255.255.255.0  
: 192.168.2.252  
: Manual  
DNS Setting  
DNS Server  
Current IP  
: 168.95.1.1  
: 192.168.2.65  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
time  
set manual  
Syntax:  
set manual <YYYY/MM/DD> <hh:mm:ss>  
Description:  
To set up the current time manually.  
Argument:  
<YYYY/MM/DD> <hh:mm:ss>  
Possible value:  
YYYY : Year  
(2000-2036)  
(01-12)  
(01-31)  
(00-23)  
(00-59)  
(00-59)  
MM  
DD  
hh  
mm  
ss  
: Month  
: Day  
: Hour  
: Minute  
: Second  
Example:  
GS-2124C(time)# set manual 2004/12/23 16:18:00  
GS-2124C(time)#  
set ntp  
Syntax:  
set ntp <ip> <timezone>  
Description:  
To set up the current time via NTP server.  
Argument:  
ip  
: ntp server ip address or domain name  
timezone : time zone (GMT), range: -12 to +13  
Possible value:  
Timezone: -12,-11…,0,1…,13  
Example:  
GS-2124C(time)# set ntp 210.59.157.10 8  
GS-2124C(time)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set daylightsaving  
Syntax:  
set daylightsaving <hr> <s:MM/DD/hh> <e:MM/DD/hh>  
Description:  
To set up the daylight saving.  
Argument:  
<hr> <s:MM/DD/hh> <e:MM/DD/hh>  
Possible value:  
hr  
s:  
e:  
MM  
DD  
hh  
: daylight saving hour, range: -5 to +5  
: daylight saving start month/day/hour  
: daylight saving end month/day/hour  
: Month (01-12)  
: Day (01-31)  
: Hour (00-23)  
Example:  
GS-2124C(time)# set daylightsaving 3 10/12/01 11/12/01  
Save Successfully  
GS-2124C(time)#  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To show the time configuration, including “Current Time”, “NTP Server”,” Timezone”,  
” Daylight Saving”,” Daylight Saving Start” and “Daylight Saving End”  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(time)# show  
Current Time  
: Thu Thu 14 15:04:03 2005  
: 209.81.9.7  
NTP Server  
Timezone  
: GMT+8:00  
Day light Saving  
Day light Saving Start  
: 0 Hours  
: Mth: 1 Day: 1 Hour: 0  
Day light Saving End : Mth: 1 Day: 1 Hour: 0  
GS-2124C(time)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
account  
add  
Syntax:  
add guest <name>  
Description:  
To create a new guest user. When you create a new guest user, you must type in  
password and confirm password.  
Argument:  
<name> : new account name  
Possible value:  
A string must be at least 5 character.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(account)# add aaaaa  
Password:  
Confirm Password:  
Save Successfully  
GS-2124C(account)#  
del  
Syntax:  
del <name>  
Description:  
To delete an existing account.  
Argument:  
<name> : existing user account  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(account)# del aaaaa  
Account aaaaa deleted  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
modify  
Syntax:  
modify <name>  
Description:  
To change the username and password of an existing account.  
Argument:  
<name> : existing user account  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(account)# modify aaaaa  
username/password: the length is from 5 to 15.  
Current username (aaaaa):bbbbb  
New password:  
Confirm password:  
Username changed successfully.  
Password changed successfully.  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To show system account ,including account name and identity.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(account)# show  
Account Name  
Identity  
----------------- ---------------  
admin  
guest  
Administrator  
guest  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
port  
set speed-duplex  
Syntax:  
set speed-duplex <range> <auto|10half|10full|100half|100full|1Gfull>  
Description:  
To set up the speed and duplex of all ports.  
Argument:  
<range>:syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<port-speed>:  
auto: set auto-negotiation mode  
10half: set speed/duplex 10M Half  
10full: set speed/duplex 10M Full  
100half: set speed/duplex 100M Half  
100full: set speed/duplex 100M Full  
1Gfull: set speed/duplex 1G Full.  
Possible value:  
<range>: 1 to 24  
<port-speed>: auto, 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1Gfull  
Example:  
GS-2124C(port)# set speed-duplex 5 auto  
show status  
Syntax:  
show status  
Description:  
To display the port’s current status.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C (port)# show status  
show simple-counter  
Syntax:  
show simple-counter  
Description:  
To display the summary counting of each port’s traffic.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C (port)# show simple-counter  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show detail-counter  
Syntax:  
Show detail-counter <range>  
Description:  
To display the detailed counting number of each port’s traffic.  
Argument:  
<range>:syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
Possible value:  
1 ~ 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C (port)# show detail-counter 5  
show conf  
Syntax:  
show conf  
Description:  
To display the each port’s configuration about state, speed-duplex and flow control.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C (port)# show conf  
show sfp  
Syntax:  
show sfp <port>  
Description:  
To display the SFP module information.  
Argument:  
<port>: available 23, 24  
Possible value:  
23, 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C (port)# show sfp 23  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
clear counter  
Syntax:  
clear counter  
Description:  
To clear all ports’ counter (include simple and detail port counter) information.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C (port)# clear counter  
enable state  
Syntax:  
enable state <range>  
Description:  
To enable the communication capability of the port.  
Argument:  
range syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
Possible value:  
<range>: 1 ~ 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C (port)# enable state 3-12  
enable flow-control  
Syntax:  
enable flow-control <range>  
Description:  
To enable the flow control function of the port.  
Argument:  
range syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
Possible value:  
<range>: 1 ~ 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C (port)# enable flow-control 3-8  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
disable state  
Syntax:  
disable state <range>  
Description:  
To disable the communication capability of the port.  
Argument:  
range syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
Possible value:  
<range>: 1 ~ 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C (port)# disable state 12  
disable flow-control  
Syntax:  
disable flow-control <range>  
Description:  
To disable the flow control function of the port.  
Argument:  
range syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
Possible value:  
<range>: 1 ~ 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C (port)# disable flow-control 6  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
mirror  
set mirror-mode  
Syntax:  
set mirror-mode <rx|disable>  
Description:  
To set up the mode of Mirror (rx mode or disable).  
Argument:  
<rx | disable>  
rx : Enable the mode of Mirror(Only mirror the packets that is received)  
disable: End the function of mirror  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mirror)# set mirror-mode rx  
GS-2124C(mirror)#  
set monitoring-port  
Syntax:  
set monitoring-port <#>  
Description:  
To set up the monitoring port of the mirror function. User can observe the packets  
that the monitored port received via this port.  
Argument:  
<#>: the monitoring port that is chosen for the mirror function. Only one port is  
allowed to configure.  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mirror)# set monitoring-port 2  
GS-2124C(mirror)#  
set monitored-port  
Syntax:  
set monitored-port <range>  
Description:  
To set up the port that will be monitored. The packets received by this port will be  
copied to the monitoring port.  
Argument:  
<range>: the port that is chosen for monitored port of the mirror function.  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mirror)# set monitored-port 3-5,8,10  
GS-2124C(mirror)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show  
Syntax:  
Show  
Description:  
To display the setting status of Mirror function.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mirror)# show  
Mirror Mode : rx  
Monitoring Port : 2  
Monitored Port : 3 4 5 7 10  
GS-2124C(mirror)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
bandwidth  
enable ingress-rate  
Syntax:  
enable ingress-rate <range> <data_rate>  
Description:  
To set up the Ingress-rate of the ports.  
Argument:  
<range>:syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<data_rate>: 0-1000.  
Possible value:  
<range>: 1 to 24  
<data_rate>: 0-1000.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(bandwidth)# enable ingress-rate 1-16 100  
enable storm-rate  
Syntax:  
enable storm-rate <range> <data_rate>  
Description:  
To set up the storm-rate of the ports.  
Argument:  
<range>:syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<data_rate>: 0-1000.  
Possible value:  
<range>: 1 to 24  
<data_rate>: 0-1000.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(bandwidth)# enable strom-rate 1-16 150  
enable egress-rate  
Syntax:  
enable egress-rate <range> <data_rate>  
Description:  
To set up the egress-rate of the port.  
Argument:  
<range>:syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<data_rate>: 0-1000.  
Possible value:  
<range>: 1 to 24  
<data_rate>: 0-1000.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(bandwidth)# enable egress-rate 1-16 200.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
disable ingress-rate  
Syntax:  
disable ingress-rate <range>  
Description:  
To cancel the Ingress-rate of the port.  
Argument:  
<range>:syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
Possible value:  
<range>: 1 to 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C(bandwidth)# disable ingress-rate 1-8  
disable storm-rate  
Syntax:  
disable ingress-rate <range>  
Description:  
To cancel the storm-rate of the port.  
Argument:  
<range>:syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
Possible value:  
<range>: 1 to 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C(bandwidth)# disable storm-rate 1-8  
disable egress-rate  
Syntax:  
disable egress-rate <range>  
Description:  
To cancel the egress-rate of the port.  
Argument:  
<range>:syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
Possible value:  
<range>: 1 to 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C(bandwidth)# disable egress-rate 1-8  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To display all current settings of the bandwidth.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(bandwidth)# show  
All State All Rate Storm State Storm Rate All state All Rate  
====== =========== ========== ============= ============ =========== ==========  
1
2
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
qos  
set mode  
Syntax:  
set mode <port/pri_tag/tos/layer4/diffserv>  
Description:  
To set qos priority mode of the switch  
Argument:  
port: per port priority  
pri_tag: vlan tag priority  
tos: ip tos classification  
layer4: ip tcp/udp port classification  
diffserv: ip diffserv classification  
Possible value:  
port/pri_tag/tos/layer4/diffserv  
Example:  
GS-2124C(qos)# set mode port  
set default  
Syntax:  
set default <class>  
Description:  
To set priority class of the packets that qos won’t affect.  
Argument:  
class: class of service  
Possible value:  
setting. 1: high, 0: low  
Example:  
GS-2124C(qos)# set default 1  
set port  
Syntax:  
set port <range> <class>  
Description:  
To set class of ports on port-based qos.  
Argument:  
<range> : port range  
<class> : class of service setting.  
Possible value:  
<range>: syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<class>: 1: high, 0: low  
Example:  
GS-2124C(qos)# set port 1-10 1  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set pri-tag  
Syntax:  
set pri_tag <port-range> <tag-range> <class>  
Description:  
To set class of ports on vlan tag-based qos.  
Argument:  
<port-range>: port range  
<tag-range>: tag priority level  
<class>: class of service  
Possible value:  
<port-range>: syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<tag-range>: priority level, syntax: 1,5-7, available from 0 to 7  
<class>: class of service setting. 1: high, 0: low  
Example:  
GS-2124C(qos)# set pri-tag 1-15 1-2 1  
set tos  
Syntax:  
set tos <port-range> <tos-range> <class>  
Description:  
To set class of ports on IP TOS qos.  
Argument:  
<port-range>: port range  
<tos-range>: tos precedence field  
<class>: class of service  
Possible value:  
<port-range>: syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<tos-range>: syntax: 1,5-7, available from 0 to 7  
<class>: 1: high, 0: low  
Example:  
GS-2124C(qos)# set tos 1-5 0-3 0  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set simple-layer4  
Syntax:  
set simple-layer4 <#>  
Description:  
To set class of ports on simple mode of Layer 4 qos.  
Argument:  
<#:> layer-4 configuration mode  
Possible value:  
<#:> valid values are following:  
0: disable ip tcp/udp port classification  
1: down prioritize web browsing, e-mail, FTP and news  
2: prioritize ip telephony (VoIP)  
3: prioritize iSCSI  
4: prioritize web browsing, e-mail, FTP transfers and news  
5: prioritize streaming Audio/Video  
6: prioritize databases (Oracle, IBM DB2, SQL, Microsoft)  
Example:  
GS-2124C(qos)# set simple-layer4 2  
set advance-layer4  
Syntax:  
set advance-layer4 <port-range> <#> <tcp/udp port> <default> <match>  
Description:  
To set class of ports on advanced mode of Layer 4 qos.  
Argument:  
<port-range>: port range  
<#:> tcp/udp port number, range: 1-10  
tcp/udp port range: 0-65535.  
match: special TCP/UDP class. 1: high, 0: low  
default: default class (all other TCP/UDP ports). 1: high, 0: low  
Possible value:  
Valid values are following:  
<port-range>: syntax: 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<#:> tcp/udp port number, range: 1-10  
<tcp/udp port range>: 0-65535.  
match: special TCP/UDP class. 1: high, 0: low  
default: default class (all other TCP/UDP ports). 1: high, 0: low  
Example:  
GS-2124C(qos)# set advance-layer4 5 2 80 1 0  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set diffserv  
Syntax:  
set diffserv <ds-range> <class>  
Description:  
To set class of ports on IP DiffServe qos.  
Argument:  
<ds-range>: dscp field  
<class>: class of service  
Possible value:  
<ds-range>: syntax: 1,5-7, available from 0 to 63  
<class>: 1: high, 0: low  
Example:  
GS-2124C(qos)# set diffserv 0-20 1  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To display the information of the mode you choose.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C (qos)# show  
IP Diffserv Classification  
Default Class:high  
DiffServ Class DiffServ Class DiffServ Class DiffServ Class  
---------- ------- ---------- ------- ---------- ------- ---------- -------  
0
4
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
1
5
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
2
6
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
3
7
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
high  
8
9
10  
14  
18  
22  
26  
30  
34  
38  
42  
46  
50  
54  
58  
62  
11  
15  
19  
23  
27  
31  
35  
39  
43  
47  
51  
55  
59  
63  
12  
16  
20  
24  
28  
32  
36  
40  
44  
48  
52  
56  
60  
13  
17  
21  
25  
29  
33  
37  
41  
45  
49  
53  
57  
61  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
snmp  
enable  
Syntax:  
enable snmp  
enable set-ability  
Description:  
The Enable here is used for the activation snmp or set-community.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(snmp)# enable snmp  
GS-2124C(snmp)# enable set-ability  
disable  
Syntax:  
disable snmp  
disable set-ability  
Description:  
The Disable here is used for the de-activation of snmp or set-community.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(snmp)# disable snmp  
GS-2124C(snmp)# disable set-ability  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set  
Syntax:  
set get-community <community>  
set set-community <community>  
set trap <#> <ip> [port] [community]  
Description:  
The Set here is used for the setup of get-community, set-community, trap host ip,  
host port and trap- community.  
Argument:  
<#>: trap number  
<ip>: ip address or domain name  
<port>: trap port  
<community>:trap community name  
Possible value:  
trap number: 1 to 6  
port:1~65535  
Example:  
GS-2124C(snmp)# set get-community public  
GS-2124C(snmp)# set set-community private  
GS-2124C(snmp)# set trap 1 192.168.1.1 162 public  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
The Show here is to display the configuration of SNMP.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(snmp)# show  
SNMP  
: Enable  
Get Community: public  
Set Community: private [Enable]  
Trap Host 1 IP Address: 192.168.1.1 Port: 162 Community: public  
Trap Host 2 IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Port: 162 Community: public  
Trap Host 3 IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Port: 162 Community: public  
Trap Host 4 IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Port: 162 Community: public  
Trap Host 5 IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Port: 162 Community: public  
Trap Host 6 IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Port: 162 Community: public  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
max-pkt-len  
set len  
Syntax:  
set len <range> <length>  
Description:  
<range> port range  
length (bytes): 1518/1532/9216  
Argument:  
<range> Port range  
<length >(bytes): Maximum Packet Length can be accepted  
Possible value:  
<range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<length>(bytes): 1518/1532/9216  
Example:  
GS-2124C(max-pkt-len)# set len 1-8 9216  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To show current setting of Maximum Packet Length setting.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(max-pkt-len)# show  
PORT Max Packet Length  
------ -------------------  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
1532  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
igmp  
set igmp_snooping  
Syntax:  
set igmp_snooping <status>  
Description:  
To set up the mode of IGMP Snooping.  
Argument:  
<status> 0:disable , 1:active , 2:passive  
Possible value:  
<status> 0,1,2  
Example:  
GS-2124C(igmp)# set igmp-snooping 2  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To display IGMP snooping mode and IP Multicast Table.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(igmp)# show  
Snoop Mode: Active  
IP Multicast:  
1) IP Address : 224.1.1.1  
VLAN ID  
: 0  
Member Port : 22  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
dhcp-boot  
set dhcp-boot  
Syntax:  
set dhcp-boot <sec>  
Description:  
To set up the delay time for DHCP Boot.  
Argument:  
<sec>:range syntax: 0, 1-30. The value “0” is to disable dhcp-boot delay  
Possible value:  
<sec>:0-30  
Example:  
GS-2124C(dhcp-boot)# set dhcp-boot 30  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To display the status of DHCP Boot.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(DHCP-BOOT)# SHOW  
DHCP BOOT : ENABLE  
Second : 10  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
vlan  
set mode  
Syntax:  
set mode <disable|port|tag|metro|double-tag> [up-link]  
Description:  
To switch VLAN mode, including disable, port-based, tag-based, metro and double-  
tag modes.  
Argument:  
disable: vlan disable  
tag: set tag-based vlan  
port: set port-based vlan  
metro: set metro mode vlan  
double-tag: enable Q-in-Q function  
up-link syntax: 1,5-7, available from 23 to 24, only for metro mode vlan  
Possible value:  
<disable|port|tag|metro|double-tag>: disable,port,tag,metro,double-tag  
[up-link]: 23 or 24 or “23,24”  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# set mode metro 23-24  
set tag-group  
Syntax:  
set tag-group <vid> <name> <range> <#>  
Description:  
To add or edit the tag-based vlan group.  
Argument:  
vid: vlan ID  
name: vlan name  
range: vlan group members, syntax: 1,5-7  
#: sym/asym vlan setting. 1: symmetric vlan, 0: asymmetric vlan  
Possible value:  
vid: range from 1 to 4094  
name: tag-vlan name  
range: from 1 to 24  
# :0,1  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# set tag-group 2 VLAN-2 2-5,6,15-13 0  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set port-group  
Syntax:  
set port-group <name> <range>  
Description:  
To add or edit a port-based VLAN group.  
Argument:  
name: vlan name  
range: vlan group members, syntax: 1,5-7  
Possible value:  
name: port-vlan name  
range: available from 1 to 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# set port-group VLAN-1 2-5,6,15-13  
set mode metro [up-link]  
Syntax:  
set mode metro [up-link]  
Description:  
To create metro groups, and select a port(s) as up-link port.  
Argument:  
Up-link: You can choose port 23 as “23”, port 24 as “24”, or port 23&24 as  
“23,24”,”23-24”.If you do not choose any up-link port, system will take port 24.  
Possible value:  
[up-link]: 23 or 24 or “23,24” or “23-24”  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# set mode metro 23-24  
set pvid  
Syntax:  
set pvid <range> <pvid>  
Description:  
To set the pvid of vlan.  
Argument:  
Range: which port(s) you want to set PVID(s).  
syntax: 1,5-7  
pvid: which PVID(s) you want to set.  
Possible value:  
Range: available from 1 to 24  
pvid: available from 1 to 4094  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# set pvid 3,5,6-8 5  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set port-role  
Syntax:  
set port-role <range> <access|trunk|hybrid> [vid]  
Description:  
To set egress rule: configure the port roles.  
Argument:  
range :which port(s) you want to set.  
access: Do not tag frames  
trunk: Tag all frames  
hybrid: Tag all frames except a specific VID  
vid: untag-vid for hybrid port  
Possible value:  
range : available from 1 to 24  
vid: available from 1 to 4094  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# set port-role 5 hybrid 6  
enable sym-vlan <range>  
Syntax:  
enable sym-vlan <range>  
Description:  
To drop frames from the non-member port.  
Argument:  
range : which port(s) you want to set. Syntax: 1,5-7  
Possible value:  
range: available from 1 to 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# enable sym-vlan 5-10  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
disable sym-vlan  
Syntax:  
disable sym-vlan <range>  
Description:  
To drop frames from the non-member port.  
Argument:  
range : which port(s) you want to set.  
Possible value:  
range: available from 1 to 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# disable sym-vlan 5-10  
enable drop-untag  
Syntax:  
enable drop-untag <range>  
Description:  
To drop the untagged frames.  
Argument:  
range: which port(s) you want to set.  
Possible value:  
range: available from 1 to 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# enable drop-untag 5-10  
disable drop-untag  
Syntax:  
disable drop-untag <range>  
Description:  
Don’t drop the untagged frames.  
Argument:  
range : which port(s) you want to set. Syntax: 1,5-7  
Possible value:  
range: available from 1 to 24  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# disable drop-untag 5-10  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
del tag-group <vid>  
Syntax:  
del tag-group <vid>  
Description:  
To delete the tag-based vlan group.  
Argument:  
vid: which vlan group you want to delete.  
Possible value:  
vid: available from 1 to 4094  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# del tag-group 2  
del port-group <name>  
Syntax:  
del port-group <name>  
Description:  
To delete the port-based vlan group.  
Argument:  
name: which vlan group you want to delete.  
Possible value:  
name: port-vlan name  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# del port-group VLAN-2  
show group  
Syntax:  
show group  
Description:  
To display the vlan mode and vlan group.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# show group  
Vlan mode is double-tag.  
1) Vlan Name : default  
Vlan ID : 1  
Sym-vlan : Disable  
Member  
: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
2) Vlan Name : VLAN-2  
Vlan ID : 2  
Sym-vlan : Disable  
Member  
: 2 3 4 5 6 13 14 15  
GS-2124C(vlan)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show pvid  
Syntax:  
show pvid  
Description:  
To display pvid, ingress/egress rule.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(vlan)# show pvid  
Port PVID  
Rule1  
Rule2  
Port Rule Untag Vid  
------ ------ --------- --------- ----------- -----------  
1
2
1 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
5 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Hybrid  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
Access  
-
-
-
-
6
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
3
4
5
5 Enable  
5 Enable  
5 Enable  
5 Enable  
1 Enable  
1 Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
1 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
...(q to quit)  
23  
24  
1 Disable Disable  
1 Disable Disable  
Access  
Access  
-
-
GS-2124C(vlan)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
mac-table  
<<information>>  
show  
Syntax:  
Show  
Description:  
To display all mac table information.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mac-table-information)# show  
MAC Table List  
Alias  
MAC Address  
Port VID State  
---------------- ----------------- ---- ---- -----------------  
GS-2124C(mac-table-information)#  
search  
Syntax:  
search <port> <mac> <vid>  
Description:  
To look for the relative mac information in mac table.  
Argument:  
<port> : set up the range of the ports to search for,  
syntax: 1,5-7, available form 1 to 24  
<mac> : mac address, format: 01-02-03-04-05-06, '?' can be used  
<vid> : vid: vlan id, from 1 to 4094; '?' as don't care, 0 as untagged  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mac-table-information)# search 1-24 ??-??-??-??-??-?? ?  
MAC Table List  
Alias  
MAC Address  
Port VID State  
---------------- ----------------- ---- ---- -----------------  
00-40-c7-88-00-06  
1 0 Dynamic  
GS-2124C(mac-table-information)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
<<maintain>>  
set aging  
Syntax:  
set aging <#>  
Description:  
To set up the age out time of dynamic learning mac.  
Argument:  
<#> : age-timer in seconds, 0, 10 to 65535. The value zero disables aging  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mac-table-maintain)# set aging 300  
GS-2124C(mac-table-maintain)#  
set flush  
Syntax:  
set flush  
Description:  
To delete all of the MACs that is learned dynamically.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mac-table-maintain)# set flush  
GS-2124C(mac-table-maintain)#  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To display the settings of age-timer.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mac-table-maintain)# show  
age-timer : 300 seconds  
GS-2124C(mac-table-maintain)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
<<static-mac>>  
add  
Syntax:  
add <mac> <port> <vid> [alias]  
Description:  
To add the static mac entry.  
Argument:  
<mac> : mac address, format: 00-02-03-04-05-06  
<port> : 0-24. the value zero means this entry is filtering entry  
<vid> : vlan id. 0, 1-4094. vid must be zero if vlan mode is not tag-based  
[alias] : mac alias name, max 15 characters  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mac-table-static-mac)# add 00-02-03-04-05-06 3 0 aaa  
GS-2124C(mac-table-static-mac)#  
del  
Syntax:  
del <mac> <vid>  
Description:  
To remove the static mac entry.  
Argument:  
<mac> : mac address, format: 00-02-03-04-05-06  
<vid> : vlan id. 0, 1-4094. vid must be zero if vlan mode is not tag-based  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mac-table-static-mac)# del 00-02-03-04-05-06 0  
GS-2124C(mac-table-static-mac)#  
show forward  
Syntax:  
show forward  
Description:  
To display the static forward table.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mac-table-static-mac)# show forward  
Static Forwarding Etnry: (Total 1 item(s))  
1) mac: 00-02-03-04-05-06, port: 3, vid: -, alias: aaa  
GS-2124C(mac-table-static-mac)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show filter  
Syntax:  
show filter  
Description:  
To display the static filter table.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mac-table-static-mac)# show filter  
Static Filtering Etnry: (Total 1 item(s))  
1) mac: 00-33-03-04-05-06, vid: -, alias: ccc  
GS-2124C(mac-table-static-mac)#  
<<alias>>  
set  
Syntax:  
set <mac> <alias>  
Description:  
To set up the mac alias entry.  
Argument:  
<mac> : mac address, format: 00-02-03-04-05-06  
<alias> : mac alias name, max 15 characters  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mac-table-alias)# set 00-44-33-44-55-44 www  
GS-2124C(mac-table-alias)#  
del  
Syntax:  
del <mac>  
Description:  
To delete the mac alias entry.  
Argument:  
<mac> : mac address, format: 00-02-03-04-05-06  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mac-table-alias)# del 00-44-33-44-55-44  
GS-2124C(mac-table-alias)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To display the mac alias entry.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(mac-table-alias)# show  
MAC Alias List  
MAC Address  
Alias  
----- ----------------- ----------------  
1) 00-02-03-04-05-06 aaa  
2) 00-33-03-04-05-06 ccc  
3) 00-44-33-44-55-66 rrr  
GS-2124C(mac-table-alias)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
gvrp  
enable  
Syntax:  
enable  
Description:  
To enable the gvrp function.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(gvrp)# enable  
disable  
Syntax:  
disable  
Description:  
To disable the gvrp function.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(gvrp)# disable  
set timer  
Syntax:  
set timer <range> <join> <leave> <leaveall>  
Description:  
To set gvrp join time, leave time, and leaveall time for each port.  
Argument:  
<range> : port range  
<join>: join timer  
<leave>: leave timer  
<leaveall>: leaveall timer  
Possible value:  
<range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<join>: available from 20 to 100  
<leave>: available from 60 to 300  
<leaveall>: available from 1000 to 5000  
Leave Time must equal double Join Time at least.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(gvrp)# set timer 2-8 25 80 2000  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set applicant  
Syntax:  
set applicant <range> <normal|non-participant>  
Description:  
To set default applicant mode for each port.  
Argument:  
range: port range  
normal: set applicant as normal mode  
non-participant: set applicant as non-participant mode  
Possible value:  
<range>: syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<normal|non-participant>: normal or non-participant  
Example:  
GS-2124C(gvrp)# set applicant 1-10 non-participant  
set registrar  
Syntax:  
set registrar <range> <normal|fixed|forbidden>  
Description:  
To set default registrar mode for each port.  
Argument:  
range: port range  
normal: set registrar as normal mode  
fixed: set registrar as fixed mode  
forbidden: set registrar as forbidden mode  
Possible value:  
<range>: syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<normal|fixed|forbidden>: normal or fixed or forbidden  
Example:  
GS-2124C(gvrp)# set registrar 1-5 fixed  
show counter  
Syntax:  
show counter  
Description:  
Usage: show counter <port>  
Argument:  
<port>: port number  
Possible value:  
<port>: available from 1 to 24  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Example:  
GS-2124C(gvrp)# show counter 2  
GVRP Counter port: 2  
Counter Name  
Received Transmitted  
-------------------- -------- -----------  
Total GVRP Packets  
Invalid GVRP Packets  
LeaveAll message  
JoinEmpty message  
JoinIn message  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
----  
0
0
0
0
0
LeaveEmpty message  
Empty message  
show config  
Syntax:  
show config  
Description:  
To display the gvrp configuration.  
Argument:  
none  
Possible value:  
none  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Example:  
GS-2124C(gvrp)# show config  
GVRP state: Enable  
Port Join Time Leave Time LeaveAll Time  
Applicant  
Registrar Restricted  
---- --------- ---------- ------------- --------------- --------- ----------  
1
2
20  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
60  
80  
80  
80  
80  
80  
80  
80  
60  
60  
60  
60  
60  
60  
60  
60  
60  
60  
60  
60  
60  
1000  
2000  
2000  
2000  
2000  
2000  
2000  
2000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
...(q to quit)  
22  
23  
24  
20  
20  
20  
60  
60  
60  
1000  
1000  
1000  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
show group  
Syntax:  
show group  
Description:  
To show the gvrp group.  
Argument:  
none  
Possible value:  
none  
Example:  
GS-2124C(gvrp)# show group  
GVRP group information  
VID Member Port  
---- -------------------------------------------------  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
stp  
enable  
Syntax:  
enable  
Description:  
To enable the STP function.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(stp)# enable  
disable  
Syntax:  
disable  
Description:  
To disable the STP function.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(stp)# disable  
set config  
Syntax:  
set config <Bridge Priority> <Hello Time> <Max. Age> <Forward Delay>  
Description:  
To set up the parameters of STP.  
Argument:  
<Bridge Priority> :Priority must be a multiple of 4096,available from 0 to 61440.  
<Hello Time>: available from 1 to 10.  
<Max. Age>: available from 6 to 40.  
<Forward Delay>: available from 4 to 30.  
Possible value:  
<Bridge Priority> 0 to 61440.  
<Hello Time>: 1 to 10.  
<Max. Age>: 6 to 40.  
<Forward Delay>: 4 to 30.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(stp)# set config 61440 2 20 15  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set version  
Syntax:  
set version <stp|rstp>  
Description:  
To set up the version of STP.  
Argument:  
<stp|rstp>:stp / rstp  
Possible value:  
<stp|rstp>:stp / rstp  
Example:  
GS-2124C(stp)# set version rstp  
set port  
Syntax:  
set port <range> <path cost> <priority> <edge_port> <admin p2p>  
Description:  
To set up the port information of STP.  
Argument:  
<range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<path cost>: 0, 1-200000000. The value zero means auto status  
<priority> : priority must be a multiple of 16, available from 0 to 240  
<edge_port> : Admin Edge Port, <yes|no>  
<admin p2p>: Admin point to point, <auto|true|false>  
Possible value:  
<range> :1 to 24  
<path cost>: 0, 1-200000000.  
<priority> : 0 to 240  
<edge_port> : yes / no  
<admin p2p>: auto / true / false  
Example:  
GS-2124C(stp)# set port 1-16 0 128 yes auto  
show status  
Syntax:  
show status  
Description:  
To display the status of STP.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Example:  
GS-2124C(stp)# show status  
STP Status :  
STP State  
: Enabled  
Bridge ID  
: 00:40:C7:D8:09:1D  
: 61440  
Bridge Priority  
Designated Root  
Designated Priority  
Root Port  
: 00:40:C7:D8:09:1D  
: 61440  
: 0  
Root Path Cost  
Current Max. Age(sec)  
Current Forward Delay(sec)  
Hello Time(sec)  
: 0  
: 20  
: 15  
: 2  
STP Topology Change Count  
: 0  
Time Since Last Topology Change(sec) : 848  
show config  
Syntax:  
show config  
Description:  
To display the configuration of STP.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(stp)# show config  
STP State Configuration  
:
Spanning Tree Protocol : Enabled  
Bridge Priority (0-61440) : 61440  
Hello Time (1-10 sec)  
Max. Age (6-40 sec)  
: 2  
: 20  
Forward Delay (4-30 sec) : 15  
Force Version : RSTP  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show port  
Syntax:  
show port  
Description:  
To display the port information of STP.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C# stp  
GS-2124C(stp)# show port  
Port Port Status Path Cost Priority Admin Edge Port Admin Point To Point  
==== =========== ========= ======== =============== ====================  
1 DISCARDING  
2 DISCARDING  
3 DISCARDING  
4 DISCARDING  
5 DISCARDING  
6 DISCARDING  
7 DISCARDING  
8 DISCARDING  
9 DISCARDING  
10 DISCARDING  
11 DISCARDING  
12 DISCARDING  
13 DISCARDING  
14 DISCARDING  
15 DISCARDING  
16 DISCARDING  
17 DISCARDING  
18 DISCARDING  
19 DISCARDING  
20 DISCARDING  
21 DISCARDING  
22 DISCARDING  
...(q to quit)  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
2000000  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
23 DISCARDING  
24 DISCARDING  
2000000  
2000000  
128  
128  
No  
No  
Auto  
Auto  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
trunk  
set priority  
Syntax:  
set priority <range>  
Description:  
To set up the LACP system priority.  
Argument:  
<range> : available from 1 to 65535.  
Possible value:  
32768  
Example:  
GS-2124C(trunk)# set priority 33333  
GS-2124C(trunk)#  
set trunk  
Syntax:  
set trunk <port-range> <method> <group> <active LACP>  
Description:  
To set up the status of trunk, including the group number and mode of the trunk as  
well as LACP mode.  
Argument:  
<port-range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<method>:  
static : adopt the static link aggregation  
lacp : adopt the dynamic link aggregation- link aggregation control protocol  
<group>: 1-8.  
<active LACP>:  
active : set the LACP to active mode  
passive : set the LACP to passive mode  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(trunk)# set trunk 1-4 lacp 1 active  
GS-2124C(trunk)#  
del trunk  
Syntax:  
del trunk <port-range>  
Description:  
Delete trunk port  
Argument:  
<port-range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(trunk)# del trunk 1  
GS-2124C(trunk)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show status  
Syntax:  
show status  
Description:  
To display the aggregator status and the settings of each port.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(trunk)# show status  
Trunk Port Setting  
Trunk Port Status  
------------------------------------- ----------------------  
port Method Group Active LACP Aggtregator Status  
====== ======== ======= ============= ============= ========  
1
2
None  
LACP  
LACP  
LACP  
LACP  
LACP  
LACP  
LACP  
LACP  
LACP  
LACP  
LACP  
LACP  
LACP  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
1
2
Ready  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
GS-2124C(trunk)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show aggtr-view  
Syntax:  
show aggtr-view  
Description:  
To display the aggregator list.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(trunk)# show aggtr-view  
Aggregator 1) Method: None  
Member Ports: 1  
Ready Ports:1  
Aggregator 2) Method: LACP  
Member Ports: 2  
Ready Ports:  
:
:
:
show lacp-detail  
Syntax:  
show lacp-detail <aggtr>  
Description:  
To display the detailed information of the LACP trunk group.  
Argument:  
<aggtr> : available from 1 to 24  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124(trunk)# show lacp-detail 2  
Aggregator 2 Information:  
Actor  
--------------------------------- ---------------------------------  
System Priority MAC Address System Priority MAC Address  
--------------- ----------------- --------------- -----------------  
Partner  
32768  
00-40-c7-e8-00-02  
32768  
00-00-00-00-00-00  
Port  
Key  
Trunk Status  
Port  
Key  
------ -------- ----------------- --------------- -----------------  
2
257  
---  
2
0
GS-2124(trunk)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show lacp-priority  
Syntax:  
show lacp-priority  
Description:  
To display the value of LACP Priority.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(trunk)# show lacp-priority  
LACP System Priority : 32768  
GS-2124C(trunk)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
802.1x  
set state  
Syntax:  
set state <ip> <port-number> <secret-key>  
Description:  
To configure the settings related with 802.1X Radius Server.  
Argument:  
<ip> : the IP address of Radius Server  
<port-number> : the service port of Radius Server(Authorization port)  
<secret-key> : set up the value of secret-key, and the length of secret-key is  
from 1 to 31  
Possible value:  
<port-number> : 1~65535, default is 1812  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# set state 192.168.1.115 1812 WinRadius  
GS-2124C(802.1x)#  
set mode  
Syntax:  
set mode <port-range> <mode>  
Description:  
To set up the 802.1X authentication mode of each port.  
Argument:  
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<mode>: set up 802.1x mode  
0:disable the 802.1x function  
1:set 802.1x to Multi-host mode  
Possible value:  
<port range> : 1 to 24  
<mode>: 0 or 1  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# set mode 2 1  
GS-2124C(802.1x)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set port-control  
Syntax:  
set port-control <port-range> <authorized>  
Description:  
To set up 802.1X status of each port.  
Argument:  
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<authorized> : Set up the status of each port  
0:ForceUnauthorized  
1:ForceAuthorized  
2:Auto  
Possible value:  
<port range> : 1 to 24  
<authorized> : 0, 1 or 2  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# set port-control 2 2  
set reAuthMax  
Syntax:  
set reAuthMax <port-range> <max>  
Description:  
The number of reauthentication attempts that are permitted before the port  
becomes Unauthorized.  
Argument:  
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<max> : max. value , range 1-10  
Possible value:  
<port range> : 1 to 24  
<max> : 1-10, default is 2  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# set reAuthMax 2 2  
set txPeriod  
Syntax:  
set txPeriod <port-range> <sec>  
Description:  
A timer used by the Authenticator PAE state machine to determine when an EAPOL  
PDU is to be transmitted  
Argument:  
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<sec> : timer , range 1-65535  
Possible value:  
<port range> : 1 to 24  
<sec> : 1-65535, default is 30  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# set txPeriod 2 30  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set quiet-period  
Syntax:  
set quiet-period <port-range> <sec>  
Description:  
A timer used by the Authenticator state machine to define periods of time during  
when it will not attempt to acquire a Supplicant.  
Argument:  
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<sec> : timer , range 0-65535  
Possible value:  
<port range> : 1 to 24  
<sec> : 0-65535, default is 60  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# set quiet-period 2 30  
set reAuthEnabled  
Syntax:  
set reAuthEnabled <port-range> <ebl>  
Description:  
A constant that define whether regular reauthentication will take place on this port.  
Argument:  
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<ebl> :  
0:OFF Disable reauthentication  
1:ON Enable reauthentication  
Possible value:  
<port range> : 1 to 24  
<ebl> : 0 or 1, default is 1  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# set reAuthEnabled 2 1  
set reAuthPeriod  
Syntax:  
set reAuthPeriod <port-range> <sec>  
Description:  
A constant that defines a nonzero number of seconds between periodic  
reauthentication of the supplicant.  
Argument:  
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<sec> : timer , range 1-65535  
Possible value:  
<port range> : 1 to 24  
<sec> : 1-65535, default is 3600  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# set reAuthPeriod 2 3600  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set max-request  
Syntax:  
set max-request <port-range> <times>  
Description:  
The maximum number of times that the state machine will retransmit an EAP  
Request packet to the Supplicant before it times out the authentication session.  
Argument:  
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<times>: max-times , range 1-10  
Possible value:  
<port range> : 1 to 24  
<times>: 1-10, default is 2  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# set max-request 2 2  
set suppTimeout  
Syntax:  
set suppTimeout <port-range> <sec>  
Description:  
A timer used by the Backend Authentication state machine in order to determine  
timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the Supplicant  
or Authentication Server. The initial value of this timer is either suppTimeout or  
serverTimeout, as determined by the operation of the Backend Authentication state  
machine.  
Argument:  
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<sec> : timer , range 1-65535  
Possible value:  
<port range> : 1 to 24  
<sec> : 1-65535, default is 30  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# set suppTimeout 2 30  
GS-2124C(802.1x)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
set serverTimeout  
Syntax:  
set serverTimeout <port-range> <sec>  
Description:  
A timer used by the Backend Authentication state machine in order to determine  
timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the Supplicant  
or Authentication Server. The initial value of this timer is either suppTimeout or  
serverTimeout, as determined by the operation of the Backend Authentication state  
machine.  
Argument:  
<port range> : syntax 1,5-7, available from 1 to 24  
<sec> : timer , range 1-65535  
Possible value:  
<port range> : 1 to 24  
<sec> : 1-65535, default is 30  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# set serverTimeout 2 30  
GS-2124C(802.1x)#  
show state  
Syntax:  
show state  
Description:  
Show the Radius server configuration  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# show state  
Radius Server: 192.168.1.115  
Port Number : 1812  
Secret Key : WinRadius  
GS-2124C(802.1x)#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show mode  
Syntax:  
show mode  
Description:  
To display the mode of each port.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# show mode  
Port  
Mode  
====== ============  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Disable  
Multi-host  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
:
:
:
show security  
Syntax:  
show security  
Description:  
To display the authentication status of each port.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# show security  
Port  
Mode  
Status  
====== ============ ==============  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Disable  
Multi-host Unauthorized  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
:
:
:
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show parameter  
Syntax:  
show parameter  
Description:  
To display the parameter settings of each port.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(802.1x)# show parameter  
port 1) port control : Auto  
reAuthMax  
txPeriod  
: 2  
: 30  
Quiet Period : 60  
reAuthEnabled : ON  
reAuthPeriod : 3600  
max. Request : 2  
suppTimeout : 30  
serverTimeout : 30  
port 2) port control : Auto  
reAuthMax  
txPeriod  
: 2  
: 30  
Quiet Period : 60  
reAuthEnabled : ON  
reAuthPeriod : 3600  
max. Request : 2  
suppTimeout : 30  
serverTimeout : 30  
:
:
:
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
alarm  
<<events>>  
set  
Syntax:  
set sms <range>  
set email <range>  
set trap <range>  
set all <range>  
Description:  
The Set here is used for the activation of sms, email and trap event.  
Argument:  
<range>: syntax 1,5-7, trap number.  
Possible value:  
available from 1 to 24.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(alarm-events)# set sms 1-3  
GS-2124C(alarm-events)# set email 1-3  
GS-2124C(alarm-events)# set trap 1-3  
GS-2124C(alarm-events)# set all 1-3  
del  
Syntax:  
del sms <range>  
del email <range>  
del trap <range>  
del all <range>  
Description:  
The Del here is used for the de-activation of sms, email and trap event.  
Argument:  
<range>:trap number.  
Possible value:  
available from 1 to 24.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(alarm-events)# del sms 1-3  
GS-2124C(alarm-events)# del email 1-3  
GS-2124C(alarm-events)# del trap 1-3  
GS-2124C(alarm-events)# del all 1-3  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
The Show here is used to display the configuration of alarm event.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(alarm-events)# show  
Events  
Email SMS Trap  
-----------------------------------------  
1 Cold Start  
v
v
v
v
v
2 Warm Start  
3 Link Down  
4 Link Up  
5 Authentication Failure  
6 User Login  
7 User Logout  
8 STP Topology Changed  
9 STP Disabled  
10 STP Enabled  
11 LACP Disabled  
12 LACP Enabled  
13 LACP Member Added  
14 LACP Port Failure  
15 GVRP Disabled  
16 GVRP Enabled  
17 VLAN Disabled  
18 Port-based Vlan Enabled  
19 Tag-based Vlan Enabled  
20 Metro-mode Vlan Enabled  
21 Double-tag Vlan Enabled  
22 Module Inserted  
23 Module Removed  
24 Moudle Media Swapped  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
<<email>>  
set  
Syntax:  
set server <ip>  
set user <username>  
set mail-address <#> <mail address>  
Description:  
The Set here is used for the configuration of e-mail server, username, password  
and address.  
Argument:  
<ip>: E-mail server ip  
<username>: email server account and password  
<#>: email address number, range: 1 to 6  
<mail address>: email address  
Possible value:  
<#>: 1 to 6  
Example:  
GS-2124C(alarm-email)# set server 192.168.1.6  
GS-2124C(alarm-email)# set user admin  
Password:  
Confirm Password:  
GS-2124C(alarm-email)# set mail-address 1 abc@mail.abc.com  
del  
Syntax:  
del <#>  
Description:  
The Del here is used to remove the configuration of E-mail address.  
Argument:  
<#>: email address number, range: 1 to 6  
Possible value:  
<#>: 1 to 6  
Example:  
GS-2124C(alarm-email)# del 2  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
The Show here is used to display the configuration of e-mail trap event.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(alarm-email)# show  
Mail Server  
Username  
: 192.168.1.6  
: admin  
Password  
: ****************  
Email Address 1: abc@mail.abc.com  
Email Address 2:  
Email Address 3:  
Email Address 4:  
Email Address 5:  
Email Address 6:  
<<sms>>  
set  
Syntax:  
set server <ip>  
set user <username>  
set phone-number <#> <phone-number>  
Description:  
The Set here is used for the configuration of SMS server, username, password and  
phone number.  
Argument:  
<ip>: SMS server ip  
<username>: SMS server account and password  
<#>: mobile phone number, range: 1 to 6  
<phone-number>: phone number  
Possible value:  
<#>: 1 to 6  
Example:  
GS-2124C(alarm-sms)# set server 192.168.1.7  
GS-2124C(alarm-sms)# set user ruby  
Password:  
Confirm Password:  
GS-2124C(alarm-sms)# set phone-number 1 0968777777  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
del  
Syntax:  
del <#>  
Description:  
The Del here is used to remove the configuration of mobile phone number.  
Argument:  
<#>: mobile phone number, range: 1 to 6  
Possible value:  
<#>: 1 to 6  
Example:  
GS-2124C(alarm-sms)# del 3  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
The Show here is to display the configuration of SMS trap event.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(alarm-sms)# show  
SMS Server  
Username  
Password  
: 192.168.1.7  
:
: ****************  
Mobile Phone 1: 0968777777  
Mobile Phone 2:  
Mobile Phone 3:  
Mobile Phone 4:  
Mobile Phone 5:  
Mobile Phone 6:  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show (alarm)  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
The Show for alarm here is used to display the configuration of Trap, SMS or E-mail.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(alarm)# show events  
GS-2124C(alarm)# show email  
GS-2124C(alarm)# show sms  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
management  
add  
Syntax:  
Usage: set [<name> <value>] [<vid> <value>] [<ip> <value>] [<port> <value>]  
[<type> <value>] <action> <value>  
Synopsis: set name Mary vid 20 ip 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.90 port 2-5,8  
type h,s action a  
Synopsis: set name Mary vid 20 ip 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.90  
Description:  
To save the adding management policy records.  
When you don’t know how to set the management policy records, you can use this  
command as follows:  
GS-2124C(management-add)# set  
This command will show exhaustive operating explanation for setting the  
management policy records.  
Argument:  
[<name> <value>]  
[<vid> <value>]  
[<ip> <value>]  
ACL entry name.  
VLAN ID.  
IP range.  
[<port> <value>]  
[<type> <value>]  
<action> <value>  
Possible value:  
[<name> <value>]  
[<vid> <value>]  
[<ip> <value>]  
[<port> <value>]  
[<type> <value>]  
<action> <value>  
Example:  
Incoming port.  
Access type.  
a(ccept) or d(eny).  
No default and it must be set.  
The range is 1-4095 and can be set to any.  
For example, 192.168.1.90-192.168.1.90 or any.  
For example, 1 or 1-8 or 1,3-5 or any  
For example, h(ttp),s(nmp),t(elnet) or any.  
No default and it must be set.  
GS-2124C(management-add)# set name Mary vid 20 ip 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.90  
port 2-5,8 type h,s action a  
GS-2124C(management-add)# show  
#: 1  
Name : Mary  
VlanID : 20  
IP : 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.90  
Port : 2,3,4,5,8  
Type : Http,SNMP  
Action : Accept  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
edit [#]: the specific management policy entry. Available range: 1 to 65536.  
Syntax:  
Usage: set [<name> <value>] [<vid> <value>] [<ip> <value>] [<port> <value>]  
[<type> <value>] <action> <value>  
Synopsis: set name Mary vid 20 ip 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.90 port 2-5,8  
type h,s action a  
Synopsis: set name Mary vid 20 ip 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.90  
Description:  
To edit management policy record.  
Argument:  
[<name> <value>]  
[<vid> <value>]  
[<ip> <value>]  
ACL entry name.  
VLAN ID.  
IP Range.  
[<port> <value>]  
[<type> <value>]  
<action> <value>  
Possible value:  
[<name> <value>]  
[<vid> <value>]  
[<ip> <value>]  
[<port> <value>]  
[<type> <value>]  
<action> <value>  
Example:  
Incoming port.  
Access type.  
a(ccept) or d(eny).  
No default and it must be set.  
The range is 1-4095 and can be set to any.  
For example, 192.168.1.90-192.168.1.90 or any  
For example, 1 or 1-8 or 1,3-5 or any  
For example, h(ttp),s(nmp),t(elnet) or any  
No default and it must be set.  
GS-2124C(management)# edit 1  
GS-2124C(management-edit-1)# set name Tom vid 2 ip 192.168.1.30-  
192.168.1.80 port 1-2 type s action d  
GS-2124C(management-edit-1)# show  
#: 1  
Name : Tom  
Type : SNMP  
VlanID : 2  
IP : 192.168.1.30-192.168.1.80  
Port : 1,2  
Action : Deny  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
delete [#]: a specific or range management security entry(s)  
Syntax:  
Usage: delete #  
Description:  
To delete a specific record or range.  
Argument:  
none  
Possible value:  
none  
Example:  
GS-2124C(management)# show  
#: 1  
Name : Tom  
Type : SNMP  
VlanID : 2  
IP : 192.168.1.30-192.168.1.80  
Port : 1,2  
Action : Deny  
GS-2124C(management)# delete 1  
GS-2124C(management)# show  
Security rule list is empty now  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To show the specific management policy record.  
Argument:  
none  
Possible value:  
none  
Example:  
GS-2124C(management)# show  
#: 1  
Name : Tom  
Type : SNMP  
VlanID : 2  
IP : 192.168.1.30-192.168.1.80  
Port : 1,2  
Action : Deny  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
diag  
diag  
Syntax:  
diag  
Description:  
Diag is used to test if UART, DRAM, Flash and EEPROM.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(diag)# diag  
EEPROM Test : OK  
UART Test : OK  
DRAM Test : OK  
Flash Test : OK  
Loopback  
Syntax:  
Loopback  
Description:  
For Internal/External Loopback Test.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(diag)# loopback  
Internal Loopback Test : OK  
External Loopback Test : Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18  
19 20 21 22 23 24 Fail  
ping  
Syntax:  
ping <ip>  
Description:  
To confirm that whether the remote end-station or switch itself is alive or not.  
Argument:  
[ip] : ip address or domain name  
Possible value:  
IP address, e.g. 192.168.2.65 or domain name, e.g. tw.yahoo.com  
Example:  
GS-2124C(diag)# ping 192.168.1.115  
Gateway  
: 192.168.1.253  
192.168.1.115 is alive.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
log  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To show a list of trap log events. When any of log events happens, it will be  
recorded and using show command in log function to query. Up to 120 log records  
are supported.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(log)# show  
Tftp Server : 0.0.0.0  
Auto Upload : Disable  
1) Wed Apr 13 12:13:27 2005 Link Up [Port 1]  
2) Wed Apr 13 12:13:26 2005 Link Down [Port 1]  
3) Wed Apr 13 11:58:31 2005 Login [admin]  
4) Wed Apr 13 11:19:45 2005 Login [admin]  
5) Wed Apr 13 11:19:37 2005 Logout [admin]  
clear  
Syntax:  
clear  
Description:  
To clear the log data.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(log)# clear  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
upload  
Syntax:  
Upload  
Description:  
To upload log data through tftp.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(log)# upload  
enable auto-upload  
Syntax:  
enable auto-upload  
Description:  
To enable the auto-upload function.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(log)# enable auto-upload  
disable auto-upload  
Syntax:  
disable auto-upload  
Description:  
To disable the auto-upload function.  
Argument:  
None.  
Possible value:  
None.  
Example:  
GS-2124C(log)# disable auto-upload  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
firmware  
set upgrade-path  
Syntax:  
set upgrade-path <filepath>  
Description:  
To set up the image file that will be upgraded.  
Argument:  
<filepath>: upgrade file path  
Possible value:  
<filepath>: upgrade file path  
Example:  
GS-2124C(firmware)# set upgrade-path gs2124_v0.96.bin.gz  
upgrade  
Syntax:  
upgrade  
Description:  
To run the upgrade function.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(firmware)# upgrade  
Upgrading firmware ...  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To display the information of tftp server and upgrade-path.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(firmware)# show  
TFTP Server IP Address: 192.168.3.111  
Path and Filename  
: gs2124_v0.99.bin.gz  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
config-file  
set export-path  
Syntax:  
set export-path <filepath>  
Description:  
To set up the filepath and filename that will be exported.  
Argument:  
<filepath>:filepath and filename  
Possible value:  
<filepath>:filepath and filename  
Example:  
GS-2124C(config-file)# set export-path log/21511.txt  
set import-path  
Syntax:  
set import-path <filepath>  
Description:  
To set up the filepath and filename that will be imported.  
Argument:  
<filepath>:filepath and filename  
Possible value:  
<filepath>:filepath and filename  
Example:  
GS-2124C(config-file)# set import-path log/21511.txt  
export start  
Syntax:  
export start  
Description:  
To run the export start function.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(config-file)# export start  
Export sucessful.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
export user-conf  
Syntax:  
export user-conf  
Description:  
To run the export user-conf function.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(config-file)# export user-conf  
Export sucessful.  
import start  
Syntax:  
import start  
Description:  
To run the import start function.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(config-file)# import start  
Export sucessful.  
import user-conf  
Syntax:  
import user-conf  
Description:  
To run the import user-conf function.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(config-file)# import user-conf  
Export sucessful.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To display the config-file information.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(config-file)# show  
TFTP Server IP Address: 192.168.3.111  
Export Path and Filename: nmap/123.ts  
Import Path and Filename: user123.txt  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
tftp  
set server  
Syntax:  
set server <ip>  
Description:  
To set up the IP address of tftp server.  
Argument:  
<ip>: tftp server ip  
Possible value:  
<ip>: tftp server ip  
Example:  
GS-2124C(tftp)# set server 192.168.3.111  
show  
Syntax:  
show  
Description:  
To display the information of tftp server.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C(tftp)# show  
Tftp Server : 192.168.3.111  
hostname  
hostname  
Syntax:  
hotsname <range> <data_rate>  
Description:  
To set up the hostname of the switch.  
Argument:  
<name>: hostname, max 128 characters.  
Possible value:  
<name>: hostname, max 128 characters.  
Example:  
GS-2124C# hostname Company  
Company#  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
autologout  
autologout  
Syntax:  
autologout <time>  
Description:  
To set up the timer of autologout.  
Argument:  
<time>: range 1 to 3600 seconds, 0 for autologout off, current setting is 180  
seconds.  
Possible value:  
<time>: 0,1-3600  
Example:  
GS-2124C# autologout 3600  
Set autologout time to 3600 seconds  
reboot  
reboot  
Syntax:  
reboot  
Description:  
To reboot the system.  
Argument:  
None  
Possible value:  
None  
Example:  
GS-2124C# reboot  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
5. Maintenance  
5-1. Resolving No Link Condition  
The possible causes for a no link LED status are as follows:  
The attached device is not powered on  
The cable may not be the correct type or is faulty  
The installed building premise cable is faulty  
The port may be faulty  
5-2. Q&A  
1. Computer A can connect to Computer B, but cannot connect to Computer C  
through the Managed Switch.  
The network device of Computer C may fail to work. Please check the  
link/act status of Computer C on the LED indicator. Try another network  
device on this connection.  
The network configuration of Computer C may be something wrong. Please  
verify the network configuration on Computer C.  
2. The uplink connection function fails to work.  
The connection ports on another must be connection ports. Please check if  
connection ports are used on that Managed Switch.  
Please check the uplink setup of the Managed Switch to verify the uplink  
function is enabled.  
3. The console interface cannot appear on the console port connection.  
The COM port default parameters are [Baud Rate: 57600, Data Bits: 8,  
Parity Bits: None, Stop Bit: A, Flow Control: None]. Please check the COM  
port property in the terminal program. And if the parameters are changed,  
please set the COM configuration to the new setting.  
Check the RS-232 cable is connected well on the console port of the  
Managed Switch and COM port of PC.  
Check if the COM of the PC is enabled.  
4. How to configure the Managed Switch?  
The “Hyperterm” is the terminal program in Win95/98/NT. Users can also use  
any other terminal programs in Linux/Unix to configure the Managed Switch.  
Please refer to the user guide of that terminal program. But the COM port  
parameters (baud rate/ data bits/ parity bits/ flow control) must be the same  
as the setting of the console port of the Managed Switch.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Appendix A  
Technical Specifications  
Features  
22 (10/100/1000Mbps) Gigabit Ethernet (TP) switching ports are compliant with  
IEEE802.3, 802.3u, 802.3z and 802.3ab.  
2 Gigabit TP/SFP fiber are dual media ports with auto detected function.  
Non-blocking store-and-forward shared-memory Web-Smart switched.  
Supports auto-negotiation for configuring speed, duplex mode.  
Supports 802.3x flow control for full-duplex ports.  
Supports collision-based and carrier-based backpressure for half-duplex ports.  
Any ports can be in disable mode, force mode or auto-polling mode.  
Supports Head of Line (HOL) blocking prevention.  
Supports broadcast storm filtering.  
Auto-aging with programmable inter-age time.  
Supports 802.1p Class of Service with 2-level priority queuing.  
Supports port sniffer function  
Programmable maximum Ethernet frame length of range from 1518 to 9216  
bytes jumbo frame.  
Supports port-based VLAN, 802.1Q tag-based VLAN.  
Efficient self-learning and address recognition mechanism enables forwarding  
rate at wire speed.  
Web-based management provides the ability to completely manage the switch  
from any web browser.  
SNMP/Telnet interface delivers complete in-band management.  
Supports IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol.  
Supports IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Trees.  
Supports IEEE 802.1x port-based network access control.  
Supports IEEE 802.1v protocol-based VLAN classification.  
Supports IP Multicasting to implement IGMP Snooping function.  
Supports 802.1p Class of Service with 2-level priority queuing.  
Supports 802.3ad port trunking with flexible load distribution and failover  
function.  
Supports ingress port security mode for VLAN Tagged and Untagged frame  
process.  
Supports SNMP MIB2 and RMON sampling with sampled packet error  
indication.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Hardware Specifications  
Standard Compliance: IEEE802.3/802.3ab / 802.3z / 802.3u / 802.3x  
Network Interface:  
Configuration  
10/100/1000Mbps Gigabit TP  
1000Base-SX Gigabit Fiber  
1000Base-LX Gigabit Fiber  
Mode  
NWay  
Connector  
TP (RJ-45)  
*SFP  
Port  
1 - 24  
23,24(Option)  
23,24(Option)  
23,24(Option)  
1000 FDX  
1000 FDX  
1000 FDX  
*SFP  
1000Base-LX Single Fiber WDM (BiDi)  
*SFP  
*Port 23, 24 are TP/SFP fiber dual media ports with auto detected function  
*Optional SFP module supports LC or BiDi LC transceiver  
Transmission Mode: 10/100Mbps support full or half duplex  
1000Mbps support full duplex only  
Transmission Speed: 10/100/1000Mbps for TP  
1000Mbps for Fiber  
Full Forwarding/Filtering Packet Rate: PPS (packets per second)  
Forwarding Rate  
1,488,000PPS  
148,800PPS  
Speed  
1000Mbps  
100Mbps  
10Mbps  
14,880PPS  
MAC Address and Self-learning: 8K MAC address  
4K VLAN table entries,  
Buffer Memory: Embedded 400 KB frame buffer  
Flow Control: IEEE802.3x compliant for full duplex  
Backpressure flow control for half duplex  
Cable and Maximum Length:  
TP  
Cat. 5 UTP cable, up to 100m  
Up to 220/275/500/550m,  
which depends on Multi-Mode Fiber type  
1000Base-SX  
1000Base-LX  
Single-Mode Fiber, up to10/30/50Km  
1000Base-LX WDM (BiDi)  
Single-Mode Single Fiber, up to 20Km  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Diagnostic LED:  
System LED :  
Per Port LED:  
Power, CPU  
10/100/1000M TP Port 1 to 24  
1000M SFP Fiber Port 23,24  
: LINK/ACT, 10/100/1000Mbps  
: SFP(LINK/ACT)  
Power Requirement  
:
AC Line  
Voltage  
Frequency  
Consumption  
:
:
:
:
:
:
100240 V  
5060 Hz  
30W  
0° to 50°C  
5% to 90%  
Ambient Temperature  
Humidity  
Dimensions  
44(H) × 442(W) × 209(D) mm  
Comply with FCC Part 15 Class A & CE Mark Approval  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Management Software Specifications  
Auto-negotiation support on 10/100/1000 Base-  
TX ports, Web browser or console interface can  
set transmission speed (10/100/1000Mbps) and  
operation mode (Full/Half duplex) on each port,  
enable/disable any port, set VLAN group, set  
Trunk Connection.  
System Configuration  
SNMP support; MIB II, Bridge MIB, RMON MIB  
Management Agent  
IEEE 802.1D  
Spanning Tree Algorithm  
Port-Base / 802.1Q-Tagged, allowed up to 256  
active VLANs in one switch.  
Ports trunk connections allowed  
VLAN Function  
Trunk Function  
IP Multicast Filtering by passively snooping  
on the IGMP Query.  
IGMP  
Supports by-port Egress/Ingress rate control  
Bandwidth Control  
Referred as Class of Service (CoS) by the  
IEEE 802.1P standard ,Classification of packet  
priority can be based on either a VLAN tag on  
packet or a user-defined  
Quality of Service (QoS)  
Per port QoS.  
Two queues per port  
IP TOS Classification  
TCP/UDP Port Classification  
IP DiffServe Classification  
Limit number of MAC addresses learned per  
port static MAC addresses stay in the filtering table.  
Bridging : 802.1D Spanning Tree  
IP Multicast : IGMP Snooping  
Port Security  
IP Multicast Packet Filtering  
Maximum of 256 active VLANs  
and IP multicast sessions  
Internetworking Protocol  
One RS-232 port as local control console  
Telnet remote control console  
SNMP agent : MIB-2 (RFC 1213)  
Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)  
Network Management  
RMON MIB (RFC 1757)-statistics  
VLAN MIB (802.1Q)  
Web browser support based on HTTP Server  
and CGI parser TFTP software-upgrade capability.  
Note: Any specification is subject to change without notice.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Appendix B  
Null Modem Cable  
Specifications  
The DB-9 cable is used for connecting a terminal or terminal emulator to the  
Managed Switch’s RS-232 port to access the command-line interface.  
The table below shows the pin assignments for the DB-9 cable.  
Function  
Mnemonic Pin  
Carrier  
CD  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Receive Data  
Transmit Data  
Data Terminal Ready  
Signal Ground  
Data Set Ready  
Request To Send  
Clear To Send  
RXD  
TXD  
DTR  
GND  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
9 Pin Null Modem Cable  
CD  
1
6
4
2
3
5
7
8
4
1
6
3
2
5
8
7
9
DTR  
CD  
DSR  
DTR  
RXD  
TXD  
GND  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
TXD  
RXD  
GND  
CTS  
RTS  
Reserve  
Reserve 9  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
Appendix C  
MIB Specifications  
The GS-2124C switch supports SNMP. MIB II Enterprise MIB brief description is  
listed as below. A MIB file in a readable electronic media (floppy disk or CD-ROM)  
is packed with the product box. For technical support or the latest version of MIB  
download, please visit our web site http://www.rubytech.com.tw.  
RUBYTECH-GS2124-MIB DEFINITIONS ::= BEGIN  
IMPORTS  
mib-2, DisplayString,ifIndex  
enterprises,Counter, TimeTicks, Gauge,IpAddress  
OBJECT-TYPE  
FROM RFC1213-MIB  
FROM RFC1155-SMI  
FROM RFC-1212  
TRAP-TYPE  
FROM RFC-1215;  
rubytech  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { enterprises 5205 }  
switch  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { rubytech 2 }  
gs2124cProductID  
gs2124cProduces  
gs2124cSystem  
gs2124cCommonSys  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { switch 9 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProductID 1 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 1 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cSystem 1 }  
gs2124cReboot OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
INTEGER(1|2)  
mandatory  
ACCESS  
read-write  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
"reboot the system. Get this oid always return zero.  
0 - do nothing  
1 - reboot without saving start  
2 - reboot with saving start"  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_common_sys  
::= { gs2124cCommonSys 1 }  
gs2124cBiosVsersion OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the BIOS version of the system."  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_common_sys  
::= { gs2124cCommonSys 2 }  
gs2124cFirmwareVersion  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
DisplayString  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the firmware version of the system."  
@@ACTION ruby_common_sys  
::= { gs2124cCommonSys 3 }  
--  
gs2124cHardwareVersion  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
DisplayString  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the hardware version of the system."  
@@ACTION ruby_common_sys  
::= { gs2124cCommonSys 4 }  
--  
gs2124cMechanicalVersion OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the mechanical version of the system."  
@@ACTION ruby_common_sys  
--  
::= { gs2124cCommonSys 5 }  
gs2124cSeriesNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the series number of the system."  
@@ACTION ruby_common_sys  
::= { gs2124cCommonSys 6 }  
--  
gs2124cHostMacAddress  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
DisplayString  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the MAC address of the system."  
@@ACTION ruby_common_sys  
::= { gs2124cCommonSys 7 }  
--  
gs2124cDevicePort  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
"Get the quantity of ports that this system owns now."  
@@ACTION ruby_common_sys  
::= { gs2124cCommonSys 8 }  
--  
gs2124cRamSize OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the RAM size of the system."  
@@ACTION ruby_common_sys  
::= { gs2124cCommonSys 9 }  
--  
gs2124cFlashSize OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the flash size of the system."  
@@ACTION ruby_common_sys  
::= { gs2124cCommonSys 10 }  
--  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cIP OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cSystem 2 }  
gs2124cDhcpSetting OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set DHCP status of the system.  
0 - DHCP disable  
1 - DHCP enable"  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_ip  
::= { gs2124cIP 1 }  
gs2124cIPAddress OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
IpAddress  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the IP address of the system.  
Can't Set this OID if DHCP status is enabled."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_ip  
::= { gs2124cIP 2 }  
gs2124cNetMask OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
IpAddress  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the netmask of the system.  
Can't Set this OID if DHCP status is enabled."  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_ip  
::= { gs2124cIP 3 }  
gs2124cDefaultGateway OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
IpAddress  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the default gateway of the system.  
Can't Set this OID if DHCP status is enabled."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_ip  
::= { gs2124cIP 4 }  
gs2124cDnsSetting OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the source of DNS server.  
Can't Set this OID if DHCP status is disabled.  
0 - manual, the DNS server is from manaul setting  
1 - auto, the DNS server is assigned by DHCP server."  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_ip  
--  
::= { gs2124cIP 5 }  
gs2124cDnsServer OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
IpAddress  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the DNS server of the system."  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_ip  
::= { gs2124cIP 6 }  
--  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cTime OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cSystem 3 }  
gs2124cSystemCurrentTime OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the current time in the system."  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_time  
::= { gs2124cTime 1 }  
--  
gs2124cManualTimeSetting OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the system time of the device.  
The input format is 'Year/Month/Day/Hour/Minute/Second'.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
ex: 2004/1/1/12/34/25 means 2004/1/1 - 12:24:25 .  
value range:  
Year : 2000 - 2036,  
Mouth : 1 - 12,  
Day : 1 - 31,  
Hour : 0 - 23,  
Minute : 0 - 59,  
sec : 0 - 59."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_time  
::= { gs2124cTime 2 }  
gs2124cNTPServer OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the NTP Time Server. You can use the IP address or  
domain name."  
-- @@ACTION ruby_sys_time  
::= { gs2124cTime 3 }  
gs2124cNTPTimeZone OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the NTP Time Zone.  
value range is between -12 and 13  
-12 - GMT -12:00,  
-11 - GMT -11:00,  
-10 - GMT -10:00,  
-9 - GMT -09:00,  
-8 - GMT -08:00,  
-7 - GMT -07:00,  
-6 - GMT -06:00,  
-5 - GMT -05:00,  
-4 - GMT -04:00,  
-3 - GMT -03:00,  
-2 - GMT -02:00,  
-1 - GMT -01:00,  
0 - GMT +00:00,  
1 - GMT +01:00,  
2 - GMT +02:00,  
3 - GMT +03:00,  
4 - GMT +04:00,  
5 - GMT +05:00,  
6 - GMT +06:00,  
7 - GMT +07:00,  
8 - GMT +08:00,  
9 - GMT +09:00,  
10 - GMT +10:00,  
11 - GMT +11:00,  
12 - GMT +12:00,  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
13 - GMT +13:00. "  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_time  
::= { gs2124cTime 4 }  
--  
gs2124cNTPTimeSync OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Sync time from NTP Server. Get this oid always return zero.  
Setting the Time Server and TimeZone before doing time sync.  
Notice that time server must be correct!  
value range (1|0):  
1 - sync.  
0 - do nothing."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_time  
::= { gs2124cTime 5 }  
gs2124cDaylightSavingTime OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(-5..5)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the daylight saveing time.  
value range is between -5 and 5. unit: hour. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_time  
::= { gs2124cTime 6 }  
gs2124cDaylightStartTime OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the Start time of Daylight Saving.  
The input format is 'MM/DD/HH',  
and daylight saving start month can't equal end month.  
example: month/day/hour 10/01/00  
month: 01~12, day: 01~31, hour: 00~23 ."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_time  
::= { gs2124cTime 7 }  
gs2124cDaylightEndTime OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the End time of Daylight Saving.  
The input format is 'MM/DD/HH',  
and daylight saving start month can't equal end month.  
example: month/day/hour 04/01/00  
month: 01~12, day: 01~31, hour: 00~23 ."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_time  
::= { gs2124cTime 8 }  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cAccount  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cSystem 4 }  
gs2124cAccountNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the current account number(s) of the system."  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_account  
--  
::= { gs2124cAccount 1 }  
gs2124cAccountTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
SEQUENCE OF GS2124CAccountEntry  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"A list of GS2124CAccountEntry. The number of entries are given  
by  
the value of gs2124cAccountNumber."  
::= { gs2124cAccount 2 }  
GS2124CAccountEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
gs2124cAccountIndex  
INTEGER,  
gs2124cAccountAuthorizationDisplayString,  
gs2124cAccountName  
gs2124cAccountPassword  
gs2124cAccountDel  
DisplayString,  
DisplayString,  
DisplayString  
}
gs2124cAccountEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
GS2124CAccountEntry  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
not-accessible  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Entry(s) for account informaion."  
INDEX {gs2124cAccountIndex}  
::= { gs2124cAccountTable 1 }  
gs2124cAccountIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The index of the account entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_accountentry  
::= { gs2124cAccountEntry 1 }  
--  
gs2124cAccountAuthorization OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The authorization of the account entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_accountentry  
::= { gs2124cAccountEntry 2 }  
--  
gs2124cAccountName OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The username of the account entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_accountentry  
::= { gs2124cAccountEntry 3 }  
--  
gs2124cAccountPassword  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
DisplayString  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The password of the account entry. The return value is always  
'********'."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_accountentry  
::= { gs2124cAccountEntry 4 }  
gs2124cAccountAddName OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The account name for adding operation."  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_account  
::= { gs2124cAccount 3 }  
--  
gs2124cAccountAddPassword OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The account password for adding operation. The return value is  
aloways '********'."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_account  
::= { gs2124cAccount 4 }  
gs2124cDoAccountAdd OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Add account name. OID gs2124cAccountAddName and  
gs2124cAccountAddPassword must be  
filled first. Get this oid always return zero.  
1 - add account.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
0 - do nothing."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_account  
::= { gs2124cAccount 5 }  
gs2124cAccountDel  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER(2..5)  
read-write  
mandatory  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
"Delete account. The value is valid gs2124cAccountIndex(Can't  
delete administrator)."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_sys_account  
::= { gs2124cAccount 6 }  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cSnmp OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 2 }  
gs2124cGetCommunity OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the get-community of the SNMP."  
@@ACTION ruby_snmp  
::= { gs2124cSnmp 1 }  
--  
gs2124cSetCommunity OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the set-community of the SNMP."  
@@ACTION ruby_snmp  
::= { gs2124cSnmp 2 }  
--  
gs2124cTrapHostNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the number of trap hosts."  
@@ACTION ruby_snmp  
::= { gs2124cSnmp 3 }  
--  
gs2124cTrapHostTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
SEQUENCE OF GS2124CTrapHostEntry  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"A list of trap host entry. The number of entries are given by the  
value of gs2124cTrapHostNumber."  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
::= { gs2124cSnmp 4 }  
GS2124CTrapHostEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
gs2124cTrapHostIndex  
gs2124cTrapHostIP  
gs2124cTrapHostPort  
gs2124cTrapHostCommunity  
}
INTEGER,  
IpAddress,  
INTEGER,  
DisplayString  
gs2124cTrapHostEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
GS2124CTrapHostEntry  
not-accessible  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Entry information for trap host."  
INDEX {gs2124cTrapHostIndex}  
::= { gs2124cTrapHostTable 1 }  
gs2124cTrapHostIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The index of the trap host entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_snmp_trapentry  
::= { gs2124cTrapHostEntry 1 }  
--  
gs2124cTrapHostIP  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
IpAddress  
read-write  
mandatory  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
"The IP of the trap host."  
@@ACTION ruby_snmp_trapentry  
::= { gs2124cTrapHostEntry 2 }  
--  
gs2124cTrapHostPort OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The receiving-port number of the trap host."  
@@ACTION ruby_snmp_trapentry  
::= { gs2124cTrapHostEntry 3 }  
--  
gs2124cTrapHostCommunity OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
"The community name for the trap PDU."  
@@ACTION ruby_snmp_trapentry  
::= { gs2124cTrapHostEntry 4 }  
--  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cAlarm  
gs2124cEvent  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 3 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cAlarm 1 }  
gs2124cEventNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the total number of alarm events."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_event  
::= { gs2124cEvent 1 }  
--  
gs2124cEventTable  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
SEQUENCE OF GS2124CEventEntry  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"A list of alarm event entry. The number of entries are given by the value of  
gs2124cEventNumber."  
::= { gs2124cEvent 2 }  
GS2124CEventEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
gs2124cEventIndex  
gs2124cEventName  
gs2124cEventSendEmail  
gs2124cEventSendSMS  
gs2124cEventSendTrap  
INTEGER,  
DisplayString,  
INTEGER,  
INTEGER,  
INTEGER  
}
gs2124cEventEntry  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
GS2124CEventEntry  
not-accessible  
mandatory  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
"Entry infomation for alarm event."  
INDEX {gs2124cEventIndex}  
::= { gs2124cEventTable 1 }  
gs2124cEventIndex  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
"The index of the alarm event entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_evententry  
--  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
::= { gs2124cEventEntry 1 }  
gs2124cEventName  
OBJECT-TYPE  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
"The alarm event name."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_evententry  
::= { gs2124cEventEntry 2 }  
--  
gs2124cEventSendEmail  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER(0|1)  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send email when alarm event is triggered."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_evententry  
::= { gs2124cEventEntry 3 }  
--  
gs2124cEventSendSMS  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER(0|1)  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send sms when alarm event is triggered."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_evententry  
::= { gs2124cEventEntry 4 }  
--  
gs2124cEventSendTrapOBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send trap when alarm event is triggered."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_evententry  
::= { gs2124cEventEntry 5 }  
--  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cEmail OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cAlarm 2 }  
gs2124cEmailServer OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"SMTP server for alarm event."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_email  
::= { gs2124cEmail 1 }  
--  
gs2124cEmailUsername OBJECT-TYPE  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Username of smtp server."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_email  
::= { gs2124cEmail 2 }  
--  
gs2124cEmailPassword OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"User password of smtp server."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_email  
::= { gs2124cEmail 3 }  
--  
gs2124cEmailUserNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The number of the email users that you want to send the alarm  
notification."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_email  
::= { gs2124cEmail 4 }  
gs2124cEmailUserTableOBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
SEQUENCE OF GS2124CEmailUserEntry  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"A list of email user entry. The number of entries are given by the value of  
gs2124cEmailUserNumber."  
::= { gs2124cEmail 5 }  
GS2124CEmailUserEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
gs2124cEmailUserIndex  
INTEGER,  
gs2124cEmailUserAddress  
DisplayString  
}
gs2124cEmailUserEntryOBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
GS2124CEmailUserEntry  
not-accessible  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Entry information for email user entry."  
INDEX {gs2124cEmailUserIndex}  
::= { gs2124cEmailUserTable 1 }  
gs2124cEmailUserIndex  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER  
SYNTAX  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The index of the email user entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_emailentry  
::= { gs2124cEmailUserEntry 1 }  
--  
gs2124cEmailUserAddress  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
DisplayString  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The email address of the email user entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_emailentry  
::= { gs2124cEmailUserEntry 2 }  
--  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cSMS OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cAlarm 3 }  
gs2124cSMSServer OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"SMS server for alarm event."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_SMS  
::= { gs2124cSMS 1 }  
--  
gs2124cSMSUsername OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Username of SMS server."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_SMS  
::= { gs2124cSMS 2 }  
--  
gs2124cSMSPassword OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"User password of SMS server."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_SMS  
::= { gs2124cSMS 3 }  
--  
gs2124cSMSUserNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The number of the SMS users that you want to send the alarm  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
notification."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_SMS  
::= { gs2124cSMS 4 }  
gs2124cSMSUserTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
SEQUENCE OF GS2124CSMSUserEntry  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"A list of SMS user entry. The number of entries are given by the value of  
gs2124cSMSUserNumber."  
::= { gs2124cSMS 5 }  
GS2124CSMSUserEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
gs2124cSMSUserIndex  
INTEGER,  
gs2124cSMSUserMobilePhone  
DisplayString  
}
gs2124cSMSUserEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
GS2124CSMSUserEntry  
not-accessible  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Entry information for SMS user entry."  
INDEX {gs2124cSMSUserIndex}  
::= { gs2124cSMSUserTable 1 }  
gs2124cSMSUserIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The index of the SMS user entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_SMSentry  
::= { gs2124cSMSUserEntry 1 }  
--  
gs2124cSMSUserMobilePhone OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The SMS phone number of the SMS user entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_alarm_SMSentry  
::= { gs2124cSMSUserEntry 2 }  
--  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cTftp OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 4 }  
gs2124cTftpServer OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
IpAddress  
read-write  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the tftp server."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_tftp  
::= { gs2124cTftp 1 }  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cConfiguration  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 5 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cConfiguration  
gs2124cSaveRestore  
1 }  
gs2124cSaveStart OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Save current configuration into flash memory (start section).  
Get this oid always return zero.  
1 - save.  
0 - do nothing. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_config_save  
::= { gs2124cSaveRestore 1 }  
gs2124cSaveUser OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Save current configuration into flash memory (user config section).  
Get this oid always return zero.  
1 - save.  
0 - do nothing. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_config_save  
::= { gs2124cSaveRestore 2 }  
gs2124cRestoreDefault OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Restore factory default configurtion.  
Get this oid always return zero.  
1 - retore.  
0 - do nothing. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_config_save  
::= { gs2124cSaveRestore 3 }  
gs2124cRestoreUser OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Restore user configurtion.  
Get this oid always return zero.  
1 - retore.  
0 - do nothing. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_config_save  
::= { gs2124cSaveRestore 4 }  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cConfigFile  
2 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cConfiguration  
gs2124cExportConfigName OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set export config file path and name."  
@@ACTION ruby_config_file  
::= { gs2124cConfigFile 1 }  
--  
gs2124cDoExportConfig OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(1|2)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Do export-config.  
Get this oid always return zero.  
1 - do export.  
0 - do nothing. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_config_file  
::= { gs2124cConfigFile 2 }  
gs2124cImportConfigName OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set export config file path and name."  
@@ACTION ruby_config_file  
::= { gs2124cConfigFile 3 }  
--  
gs2124cDoImportConfig OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(1|2)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Do import-config.  
Get this oid always return zero.  
1 - do import.  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
0 - do nothing. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_config_file  
::= { gs2124cConfigFile 4 }  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cDiagnostic  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 6 }  
gs2124cEEPROMTest OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"EEPROM access test."  
@@ACTION ruby_diagnostic  
::= { gs2124cDiagnostic 1 }  
--  
gs2124cUartTest OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"UART access test."  
@@ACTION ruby_diagnostic  
::= { gs2124cDiagnostic 2 }  
--  
gs2124cDramTest OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"DRAM access test."  
@@ACTION ruby_diagnostic  
::= { gs2124cDiagnostic 3 }  
--  
gs2124cFlashTest OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Flash memory access test."  
@@ACTION ruby_diagnostic  
::= { gs2124cDiagnostic 4 }  
--  
gs2124cInternalLoopbackTest OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Internel loopback test."  
@@ACTION ruby_diagnostic  
::= { gs2124cDiagnostic 5 }  
--  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
gs2124cExternalLoopbackTest OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Externel loopback test."  
@@ACTION ruby_diagnostic  
::= { gs2124cDiagnostic 6 }  
--  
gs2124cPingTest OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Set the host address that you want to ping and the system will  
return the test result."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_diagnostic  
::= { gs2124cDiagnostic 7 }  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cLog OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 7 }  
gs2124cClearLog OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Clear system log.  
Get this oid always return zero.  
1 - clear log.  
0 - do nothing. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_log  
::= { gs2124cLog 1 }  
gs2124cUploadLog OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Upload current system log. Set the correct tftp server first.  
The format of log file is 'ModelName_SeriesNumbuer_YYMMDD_HHMM'.  
Get this oid always return zero.  
1 - upload log  
0 - do nothing. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_log  
::= { gs2124cLog 2 }  
gs2124cAutoUploadLogState OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
"Enable log auto-upload function. Set the correct tftp server first.  
The format of log file is 'ModelName_SeriesNumbuer_YYMMDD_HHMM'.  
Get this oid always return zero.  
1 - Enable auto-upload  
0 - do nothing. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_log  
::= { gs2124cLog 3 }  
gs2124cLogNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the number of current system log. "  
@@ACTION ruby_log  
::= { gs2124cLog 4 }  
--  
gs2124cLogTable  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
SEQUENCE OF GS2124CLogEntry  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"A list of log entry. The number of entries are given by the value of  
gs2124cLogNumber."  
::= { gs2124cLog 5 }  
GS2124CLogEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
gs2124cLogIndex  
gs2124cLogEvent  
INTEGER,  
DisplayString  
}
gs2124cLogEntry  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
GS2124CLogEntry  
not-accessible  
mandatory  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
"Entry information for system log."  
INDEX {gs2124cLogIndex}  
::= { gs2124cLogTable 1 }  
gs2124cLogIndex  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
"The index of the log entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_logentry  
::= { gs2124cLogEntry 1 }  
--  
gs2124cLogEvent  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
DisplayString  
read-only  
ACCESS  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The detail information of the log entry."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_logentry  
::= { gs2124cLogEntry 2 }  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cFirmware  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 8 }  
gs2124cFirmwareFileName OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the path and filename for firmware upgrading."  
@@ACTION ruby_Firmware  
::= { gs2124cFirmware 1 }  
--  
gs2124cDoFirmwareUpgrade OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Do firmware upgrade. Get this oid always return zero.  
1 - do firmware upgrade.  
0 - do nothing."  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_Firmware  
::= { gs2124cFirmware 2 }  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cPort  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 9 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cPort 1 }  
gs2124cPortStatus  
gs2124cPortStatusNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the number of port state."  
@@ACTION ruby_port_status  
::= { gs2124cPortStatus 1 }  
--  
gs2124cPortStatusTableOBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
SEQUENCE OF GS2124CPortStatusEntry  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"A list of port status entry. The number of entries are given by the value of  
gs2124cPortStatusNumber."  
::= { gs2124cPortStatus 2 }  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
GS2124CPortStatusEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
gs2124cPortStatusIndex  
gs2124cPortStatusMedia  
gs2124cPortStatusLink  
gs2124cPortStatusPortState  
gs2124cPortStatusAutoNego  
gs2124cPortStatusSpdDpx  
gs2124cPortStatusFlwCtrl  
}
INTEGER,  
DisplayString,  
DisplayString,  
DisplayString,  
DisplayString,  
DisplayString,  
DisplayString  
gs2124cPortStatusEntryOBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
GS2124CPortStatusEntry  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
not-accessible  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Entry(s) for port status informaion."  
INDEX {gs2124cPortStatusIndex}  
::= { gs2124cPortStatusTable 1 }  
gs2124cPortStatusIndex  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The index of the port status entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_port_status_entry  
::= { gs2124cPortStatusEntry 1 }  
--  
gs2124cPortStatusMedia  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
DisplayString  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The port media type of the port status entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_port_status_entry  
::= { gs2124cPortStatusEntry 2 }  
--  
gs2124cPortStatusLink OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The port link of the port status entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_port_status_entry  
::= { gs2124cPortStatusEntry 3 }  
--  
gs2124cPortStatusPortState  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
DisplayString  
ACCESS  
read-only  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
"The port state of the port status entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_port_status_entry  
::= { gs2124cPortStatusEntry 4 }  
--  
gs2124cPortStatusAutoNego  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
DisplayString  
ACCESS  
read-only  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The auto negotiation of the port status entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_port_status_entry  
::= { gs2124cPortStatusEntry 5 }  
--  
gs2124cPortStatusSpdDpx  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
DisplayString  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The speed/duplex of the port status entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_port_status_entry  
::= { gs2124cPortStatusEntry 6 }  
--  
gs2124cPortStatusFlwCtrl  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
DisplayString  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The flow control of the port status entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_port_status_entry  
::= { gs2124cPortStatusEntry 7 }  
--  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cPortConf OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cPort 2 }  
gs2124cPortConfNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the number of port configuration."  
@@ACTION ruby_port_conf  
::= { gs2124cPortConf 1 }  
--  
gs2124cPortConfTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
SEQUENCE OF GS2124CPortConfEntry  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"A list of port configuration entry. The number of entries are given by the value  
of gs2124cPortConfNumber."  
::= { gs2124cPortConf 2 }  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
GS2124CPortConfEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
gs2124cPortConfIndex  
gs2124cPortConfPortState  
gs2124cPortConfSpdDpx  
gs2124cPortConfFlwCtrl  
}
INTEGER,  
INTEGER,  
INTEGER,  
INTEGER  
gs2124cPortConfEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
GS2124CPortConfEntry  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
not-accessible  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Entry(s) for port configuration informaion."  
INDEX {gs2124cPortConfIndex}  
::= { gs2124cPortConfTable 1 }  
gs2124cPortConfIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The index of the port configuration entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_port_conf_entry  
::= { gs2124cPortConfEntry 1 }  
--  
gs2124cPortConfPortState  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER(1|0)  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The port state of the port configuration entry.  
0 - disabled.  
1 - enabled. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_port_conf_entry  
::= { gs2124cPortConfEntry 2 }  
gs2124cPortConfSpdDpx  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER(0..5)  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The speed/duplex of the port configuration entry.  
0 - auto.  
1 - 10M/Half.  
2 - 10M/Full.  
3 - 100M/Half.  
4 - 100M/Full.  
5 - 1G/Full. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_port_conf_entry  
::= { gs2124cPortConfEntry 3 }  
gs2124cPortConfFlwCtrl  
OBJECT-TYPE  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(1|0)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The flow control of the port configuration entry.  
0 - disabled.  
1 - enabled. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_port_conf_entry  
::= { gs2124cPortConfEntry 4 }  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cMirror OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 10 }  
gs2124cMirrorMode OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(1|0)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the Mirror mode.  
0 - disabled.  
1 - enable. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_mirror  
::= { gs2124cMirror 1 }  
gs2124cMirroringPort OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(1..24)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the mirroring port.  
The port range from 1 to 24. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_mirror  
::= { gs2124cMirror 2 }  
gs2124cMirroredPorts OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DisplayString  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the monitored ports.  
The port range from 1 to 24, and the syntax is 1,5-7. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_mirror  
::= { gs2124cMirror 3 }  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cMaxPktLen  
gs2124cMaxPktLen1  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 11 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cMaxPktLen 1 }  
gs2124cMaxPktLenPortNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the number of Max. packet length."  
@@ACTION ruby_maxpktlen_conf  
::= { gs2124cMaxPktLen1 1 }  
--  
gs2124cMaxPktLenConfTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
SEQUENCE OF GS2124CMaxPktLenConfEntry  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"A list of Max. packet length entry. The number of entries are given by the  
value of gs2124cMaxPktLenPortNumber."  
::= { gs2124cMaxPktLen1 2 }  
GS2124CMaxPktLenConfEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
gs2124cMaxPktLenConfIndex  
gs2124cMaxPktLenConfSetting  
INTEGER,  
INTEGER  
}
gs2124cMaxPktLenconfEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
GS2124CMaxPktLenConfEntry  
not-accessible  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Entry(s) for Max. packet length informaion."  
INDEX {gs2124cMaxPktLenConfIndex}  
::= { gs2124cMaxPktLenConfTable 1 }  
gs2124cMaxPktLenConfIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The index of the Max. packet length entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_maxpktlen_conf_entry  
::= { gs2124cMaxPktLenconfEntry 1 }  
--  
gs2124cMaxPktLenConfSetting OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(1518|1532|9216)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the Max. packet length.  
The Max. packet length is 1518,1532,or 9216. "  
@@ACTION ruby_maxpktlen_conf_entry  
::= { gs2124cMaxPktLenconfEntry 2 }  
--  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cBandwidth OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 12 }  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
gs2124cBandwidth1  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cBandwidth 1 }  
gs2124cBandwidthPortNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get the number of bandwidth management configuration."  
@@ACTION ruby_bandwidth  
::= { gs2124cBandwidth1 1 }  
--  
gs2124cBandwidthConfTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
SEQUENCE OF GS2124CBandwidthConfEntry  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"A list of bandwidth management configuration entry. The number of entries  
are given by the value of gs2124cBandwidthPortNumber."  
::= { gs2124cBandwidth1 2 }  
GS2124CBandwidthConfEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
gs2124cBandwidthConfIndex  
INTEGER,  
INTEGER,  
INTEGER,  
INTEGER,  
INTEGER,  
INTEGER,  
INTEGER  
gs2124cBandwidthConfIgressState  
gs2124cBandwidthConfIgressBW  
gs2124cBandwidthConfStormState  
gs2124cBandwidthConfStormBW  
gs2124cBandwidthConfEgressState  
gs2124cBandwidthConfEgressBW  
}
gs2124cBandwidthConfEntry  
SYNTAX  
OBJECT-TYPE  
GS2124CMaxPktLenConfEntry  
ACCESS  
not-accessible  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Entry(s) for bandwidth management configuration informaion."  
INDEX {gs2124cBandwidthConfIndex}  
::= { gs2124cBandwidthConfTable 1 }  
gs2124cBandwidthConfIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER  
read-only  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The index of the bandwidth management configuration entry."  
@@ACTION ruby_bandwidth_entry  
--  
::= { gs2124cBandwidthConfEntry 1 }  
gs2124cBandwidthConfIgressState  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
STATUS  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"The igress state of the bandwidth management configurateion  
entry.  
--  
0 - disabled.  
1 - enabled. "  
@@ACTION ruby_bandwidth_entry  
::= { gs2124cBandwidthConfEntry 2 }  
gs2124cBandwidthConfIgressBW  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER(0..1000)  
read-write  
mandatory  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the igress rate of the bandwidth management  
configuration.  
The igrees rate is from 0 to 1000. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_bandwidth_entry  
::= { gs2124cBandwidthConfEntry 3 }  
gs2124cBandwidthConfStormState  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
"The storm state of the bandwidth management configurateion entry.  
0 - disabled.  
1 - enabled. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_bandwidth_entry  
::= { gs2124cBandwidthConfEntry 4 }  
gs2124cBandwidthConfStormBW  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER(0..1000)  
read-write  
mandatory  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the storm rate of the bandwidth management configuration.  
The storm rate is from 0 to 1000. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_bandwidth_entry  
::= { gs2124cBandwidthConfEntry 5 }  
gs2124cBandwidthConfEgressState  
OBJECT-TYPE  
INTEGER(0|1)  
read-write  
mandatory  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
DESCRIPTION  
"The egress state of the bandwidth management configurateion  
entry.  
--  
0 - disabled.  
1 - enabled. "  
@@ACTION ruby_bandwidth_entry  
::= { gs2124cBandwidthConfEntry 6 }  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
gs2124cBandwidthConfEgressBW  
OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
ACCESS  
STATUS  
INTEGER(0..1000)  
read-write  
mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
"Get/Set the egress rate of the bandwidth management  
configuration.  
The egress rate is from 0 to 1000. "  
--  
@@ACTION ruby_bandwidth_entry  
::= { gs2124cBandwidthConfEntry 7 }  
-----------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cTrapEntry  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 20 }  
gs2124cModuleInserted NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
OBJECTS { ifIndex }  
STATUS current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when a moudle is inserted to the system. The OID value  
means  
the port number."  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 1 }  
gs2124cModuleRemoved NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
OBJECTS { ifIndex }  
STATUS current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when a moudule is removed from the system. The OID  
value means  
the port number."  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 2 }  
gs2124cDualMediaSwapped NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
OBJECTS { ifIndex }  
STATUS current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when the dual media port changed. The OID value means  
the port number."  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 3 }  
gs2124cStpStateDisabled NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when the operational state of STP is from enabled to  
disabled. "  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 100 }  
gs2124cStpStateEnabled NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when the operational state of STP is from disabled to  
enabled. "  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 101 }  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
gs2124cStpTopologyChanged NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
OBJECTS { ifIndex }  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when RSTP determines a port should enter the  
FORWARDING state  
(a topology change occurs). The OID value is the ifIndex of the port that  
produces the topology change"  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 102 }  
gs2124cLacpStateDisabled NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
OBJECTS {ifIndex, groupId}  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when the operational state of LACP is from enabled to  
disabled.  
The OID value means the disabled Group ID."  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 120 }  
gs2124cLacpStateEnabled NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
OBJECTS {ifIndex, groupId}  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when the operational state of LACP is from disabled to  
enabled.  
The OID value means the disabled Group ID."  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 121 }  
gs2124cLacpPortAdded NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
OBJECTS { ifIndex, actor-key, partner-key }  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when the state of port is in 'trunk ready'."  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 123 }  
gs2124cLacpPortTrunkFailure NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
OBJECTS { ifIndex, actor-key, partner-key}  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when one port is not able to be aggregated  
due to duplex-mode of the port. "  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 124 }  
gs2124cGvrpStateDisabled NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when the operational state of GVRP is from enabled to  
disabled. "  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 140 }  
gs2124cGvrpStateEnabled NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
STATUS  
current  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when the operational state of LACP is from disabled to  
enabled. "  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 141 }  
gs2124cVlanStateDisabled NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when the operational state of vlan is from enabled to  
disabled.  
The OID value means the enabled Group ID. "  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 150 }  
gs2124cVlanPortBaseEnabled NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when the operational state of vlan is changed to port-  
based vlan."  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 151 }  
gs2124cVlanTagBaseEnabled NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when the operational state of vlan is changed to tag-based  
vlan."  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 152 }  
gs2124cVlanMetroModeEnabled NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
OBJECTS {uplink}  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when the operational state of vlan is changed to Metro-  
mode vlan.  
The OID vlaue means the uplink port with this metro-mode vlan."  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 153 }  
gs2124cVlanDoubleTagEnabled NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when the operational state of vlan is changed to Double-  
tag vlan."  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 154 }  
gs2124cUserLogin NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
OBJECTS {username}  
STATUS  
current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when one user logins the system."  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 200 }  
gs2124cUserLogout NOTIFICATION-TYPE  
OBJECTS {username}  
STATUS  
current  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GS-2124C User Manual  
DESCRIPTION  
"Send this trap when one user logouts the system."  
::= { gs2124cTrapEntry 201 }  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------  
gs2124cTrapVariable OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { gs2124cProduces 21 }  
username OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS current  
DisplayString  
DESCRIPTION  
"System account name."  
::= { gs2124cTrapVariable 1 }  
groupId OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS current  
DESCRIPTION  
"The Trunk group ID of LACP."  
::= { gs2124cTrapVariable 2 }  
actor-key OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS current  
DESCRIPTION  
"The actor key information for LACP."  
::= { gs2124cTrapVariable 3 }  
partner-key OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS current  
DESCRIPTION  
"The partner key information for LACP."  
::= { gs2124cTrapVariable 4 }  
uplink OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString  
MAX-ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS current  
DESCRIPTION  
"Uplink port(s) in the metro-mode vlan."  
::= { gs2124cTrapVariable 5 }  
END  
Publication date: June, 2005  
Revision A1  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Radio Shack Stereo Amplifier PT 990A User Guide
RCA CRT Television 20V414T User Guide
RCA CRT Television F19440 User Guide
RocketFish Power Supply RF 900WPS User Guide
Rover Lawn Mower 53179 User Guide
Samsung Cell Phone A847M User Guide
Samsung DVR SHR 2040 User Guide
Samsung Printer ML 6040 User Guide
Samsung Refrigerator GI6FARXXQ User Guide
Sanus Systems Indoor Furnishings UF34 User Guide